JP7255654B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine displays a dynamic display of a special pattern to notify the result of the lottery when a game ball enters a plurality of starting holes provided on the game board surface. Executed at the display device. In such a configuration, the success or failure of the game is individually drawn for each starting opening, and the lottery result is a special symbol corresponding to each starting opening (for example, the first special symbol for two starting openings). A system has been proposed in which the lottery result is notified after the dynamic display of the symbol and the second special symbol.

JP-A-2005-319221 JP 2011-160842 A

By the way, such a game machine has a problem of causing confusion for players .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing player confusion.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can acquire the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and can acquire the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. acquisition means; storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means; determination capable of performing a first determination based on the first information stored in the storage means, and performing a second determination based on the second information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a second determination condition; means, first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result in the first determination, and second identification information for indicating a second determination result in the second determination. a second display means dynamically displayed, wherein the first identification information or the second determination result for indicating that the first determination result is a specific first determination result is a specific second determination result; When the second identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is provided, and the dynamic display period of the first identification information can be determined. and dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the second identification information, and when the first information is newly stored in the storage means, the newly stored Acquisition determination is executed as a predetermined determination corresponding to the first information stored, whereby the order in which the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the stored first information is started is identifiably predetermined. When information corresponding to the first information determined to be acquired is stored in the storage area of and the second information is newly stored in the storage means, corresponding to the newly stored second information By executing the acquisition determination, the acquisition-determined second identification information is stored in a predetermined storage area so that the order in which the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the stored second information is started can be identified. information storage means for storing information corresponding to information; and the number of the first information items before the first determination is performed among the first information items acquired by the acquisition means. first number display information; and second number display information capable of indicating the number of the second information before the second determination is performed among the second information acquired by the acquisition means. Number display means that can be displayed respectively, and the display position of the first number display information that is displayed based on the information stored in the information storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The order in which the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first numerical display information is started is higher than the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second numerical display information displayed. means capable of notifying the order in which the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by moving to the display position side indicating that the turn is close, and the predetermined Based on the establishment of the condition, a specific display mode can be displayed on the back side where the first number display information and the second number display information are displayed, and the predetermined condition is the It is configured so as not to be established during the privilege game .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, an acquisition means capable of acquiring the first information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and capable of acquiring the second information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means; and the first information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a first determination condition. determining means capable of performing a first determination based on the above, and performing a second determination based on the second information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a second determination condition; A first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the first determination result in the first determination, and a second identification information for indicating the second determination result in the second determination are dynamically displayed. and a second display means, wherein the first identification information or the second determination result for indicating that the first determination result is a specific first determination result is a specific second determination result. When the second identification information for indicating is stopped and displayed, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given respectively, it is possible to determine the dynamic display period of the first identification information, 2 dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of identification information; Acquisition determination is executed as predetermined determination correspondingly, and the order in which the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the stored first information is started is identifiably stored in the predetermined storage area. When information corresponding to the first information determined to be acquired is stored and the second information is newly stored in the storage means, the acquisition determination is executed corresponding to the newly stored second information. information corresponding to the acquired and determined second information in a predetermined storage area so that the order in which the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the stored second information is started can be identified. and first number display information capable of indicating the number of said first information before said first discrimination is executed among said first information acquired by said acquiring means. and second number display information capable of indicating the number of the second information before the second determination is performed among the second information acquired by the acquisition means. possible number display means, and the display position of the first number display information being displayed based on the information stored in the information storage means when a predetermined condition is established. The order in which the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first numerical display information is started is closer than the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the second numerical display information. means for notifying the order in which the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by moving to the indicated display position side, and that the predetermined condition is established. Based on, it is possible to display a specific display mode on the back side where the first number display information and the second number display information are displayed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied during the privilege game configured not to .

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (a) is a see-through view of the inside of the sorting device in the first embodiment from the front side, and (b) is a see-through view of the inside of the sorting device in the first embodiment from the rear side. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device in the first embodiment, (b) is a reserved symbol display displayed in the third symbol display device in the first embodiment 1 is a diagram schematically showing a display mode before and after rearrangement of . It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, a special symbol reserved ball storage area, a special symbol reserved ball execution area, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area, and a normal symbol reserved ball execution area in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, (b) is a diagram schematically showing a jackpot random number table in the first embodiment, (c) is a diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table in the first embodiment, and (d) is a diagram schematically showing a random number table per normal symbol in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a rearrangement pending storage area in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing a secondary rearrangement pending storage area in the first embodiment. . (a) is a diagram schematically showing a normal time special per variation pattern table in the first embodiment, (b) schematically shows a normal time special out variation pattern table in the first embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the time-saving/probability-variable special per variation pattern table in the first embodiment, (b) schematically shows the time-saving/probability-variable special deviation variation pattern table in the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the pending|holding design display in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the process of rearrangement of the pending|holding design display in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a second special symbol variation stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing first prefetching processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing first prefetch update processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd look-ahead processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch update process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 7 is a flowchart showing pending number display update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing temporary fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing pending rearrangement processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment; It is the figure which showed typically the special non-adjustment fluctuation pattern table for adjustment in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory area of RAM of MPU of the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize-winning process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a first consecutive winning determination process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a pending number display update process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing pending rearrangement processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in the modification of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing pending rearrangement processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 6th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing pending number display update processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a large opening opening/closing process executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device in a seventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the content of ROM of the main controller in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 3 executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a first prefetching process 2 executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 3 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing pending rearrangement processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing pending rearrangement order determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing slave pending rearrangement pending storage area update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. (a) is a see-through view of the inside of the sorting device in the ninth embodiment from the front side, and (b) is a see-through view of the inside of the sorting device in the ninth embodiment from the rear side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit in a ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 4 executed by an MPU in a main controller in a ninth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning route notification processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the ninth embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing start winning process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the tenth embodiment; FIG. (a) to (b) are diagrams schematically showing the display area of the third pattern display device in the eleventh embodiment, and (c) is a display of the third pattern display device in a modification of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing regions; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modified example of the eleventh embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the twelfth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a thirteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the thirteenth embodiment; FIG. (a) to (c) are diagrams schematically showing the display area of the third pattern display device in the fourteenth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically a part of other memory area of RAM of MPU of the main control unit in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a first caution notice process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifteenth embodiment; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 6 performed by MPU in the main controller in 16th Embodiment. (a) to (b) are diagrams schematically showing the display area of the third pattern display device in the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing part of another memory area of the RAM of the MPU of the main control unit in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 32 is a diagram schematically showing a secondary rearrangement reserved storage area in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing first prefetch update processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a first notification lottery process executed by an MPU in a main controller in a seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing a first extended variation look-ahead process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing second prefetch update processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing second notification lottery processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the seventeenth embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special design variation pattern selection process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design variation pattern selection process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 17th Embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing pending number display update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventeenth embodiment; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 40. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63a, 63b, 67, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when rearranging reserved symbol displays (Ds1 to Ds8) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "dollar box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for ball guidance, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a first starting port 63a, a second 2 starting port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The first starting port 63a, the second starting port 63b, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and can be viewed from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed with a wood screw or the like. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A distribution winning device 630 is provided in the lower center of the game area. FIG. 4(a) is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 630 viewed from the front. FIG. 4(b) is a perspective view of the sorting winning device 630 as seen from the back.

As shown in FIG. 4( a ), the distribution winning device 630 is provided with a normal electric accessory 64 at its upper portion. In the normal state, the normal electric accessory 64 is arranged in a state in which the facing blades 64a and 64b stand upright at an interval (the diameter of the game ball is about 11 mm) that allows about one game ball to enter. . In the normal state (when the wings 64a and 64b stand up), the route for game balls to enter the distribution device 630 is only the route passing between the wings 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64. , the player first shoots a game ball so as to pass the game ball between the vanes 64 a and 64 b of the normal electric accessory 64 .

When a game ball enters the sorting device 630, a passive sorting member 640 is arranged, and the passive sorting member 640 receives the entered game ball in a receiving portion 640a or 640b. When the game ball is received by the storage portion 640a, the passive distribution member 640 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball (see FIG. 4(a)), and moves the game ball to the first starting port. 63a. Here, each of the passive distribution members 640 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet 640c is provided on the boundary wall between the storage section 640a and the storage section 640b.

On the base body 900 provided on the back side of the distribution winning device 630, the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 is positioned on the center line between the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64. The base side magnet 900a is arranged. It is As shown in FIG. 4(c), the distribution winning device 630 is viewed from above, the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 and the base-side magnet 900a are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 900a is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body 900, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at its tip. The base-side magnet 900a is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the passive sorting member 640 side.

The magnet 640c of the passive sorting section 640 is also made of a rod-shaped magnet similar to the base-side magnet 900a, and is fixed to the passive sorting member 640 so that the tip faces toward the base-side magnet 900a. The passive distribution member 640 rotates, and the boundary wall between the storage portion 640a and the storage portion 640b is positioned directly above (on the center line of the interval where the opposing blades 64a and 64b can enter about one ball). , the base-side magnet 900a and the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at the position where the boundary wall of the passive distribution member 640 faces directly upward. It is maintained at a position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 640c of the passive distribution member 640 is positioned on the center line between the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 (upward position), the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900a By repulsion, the passive sorting member 640 rotates to the left or right, and either the housing portion 640a or the housing portion 640b receives the game balls entering the sorting device 630 (upper side of the gaming machine). to face. Therefore, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring due to contact of the entering game ball with the boundary wall between the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b.

In addition, the magnet 640c and the base-side magnet 900c repel each other, for example, the housing portion 640a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and guides the game ball to the first starting port 63a. It is possible to prevent the distribution member 640 from rotating to the right (accommodating portion 640a faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first starting port 63a, the accommodation portion 640b faces upward. The weight of the passive distribution member 640 rotates about 180 degrees to the right to guide the game ball to the second starting port 63b. In this way, the passive distribution member 640 can alternately guide game balls entering the distribution device 630 to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b to win a prize, and a lottery game (hereinafter referred to as the first lottery game) and a lottery game (hereinafter, referred to as a second lottery game) resulting from winning a prize to the second start port 63b can be efficiently executed.

A normal symbol starting port 67 is provided on the left side of the center of the game board 13 . The normal symbol starting port 67 is a gate-type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is performed. In the lottery performed in response to the passing of the game ball to the normal symbol starting port 67, the success or failure determination of whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed.

When the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display section 88 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later, and "○" and "X" are displayed. symbols alternately light up for a predetermined period of time (for example, 20 seconds), then normal symbols ("○" or "X" symbols in this embodiment) indicating the lottery result are stopped (lighted up). When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display unit 88, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is changed to the first symbol display device 37. Displayed by

When it is determined that the normal symbol wins, the second symbol display portion 88 lights up a symbol "○" indicating that the normal symbol lottery wins. When a winning pattern is displayed, the normal electric accessory 64 is activated, and the wings 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64, which are normally maintained in an upright state, are raised substantially vertically. By moving in a substantially V shape (inverted V shape) and guiding the game ball by the vanes 64a and 64b, the game ball can easily enter the distribution device 630 for a predetermined time (1.2 seconds in this embodiment). Become. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of the lottery, the second symbol display portion 88 lights up a symbol "x" indicating that the normal symbol lottery is out of the lottery.

A first pattern display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. A plurality of LEDs 37a light up the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) whose variable display has not been performed among the balls that have won the first start port 63a, the second start port 63b, and the normal symbol start port 67. It is indicated by the state. In addition, the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display are indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two left and right 7-segment LEDs. The 7-segment LED on the left side variably displays (dynamically displays) the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game. Specifically, variable display until the variable time (dynamic display time) elapses, which is determined based on the winning of the first starting port 63a (in this embodiment, the middle segment of the 7 segments is blinking). After that, a symbol indicating the judgment result is stopped and displayed. If the judgment result is out, a symbol "-" indicating the outage is displayed with one segment in the center lit up. On the other hand, when the determination result is a win, a symbol different from the symbols indicating the loss, such as symbols "3" and "7" corresponding to the win, is displayed. The second lottery game is configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the emitted colors.

As will be described later, the variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 has a variable time set for each variation mode, and corresponds to the dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns can be classified into a long-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time and a short-term fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time, depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is reachable or not. In this way, even when roughly sorted by a fixed standard of time (here, reach, non-reach, or a reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), dynamic It corresponds to the display mode.

In addition, as will be described later, the time information until the fluctuation start time corresponds to the accurate fluctuation start time, and the time information of the rough fluctuation pattern described above (for example, whether it is a long-term fluctuation pattern) This also applies to information about time information (for example, the number of times of long-term fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation, etc.) determined based on whether or not the fluctuation is started.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the winning of the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery) is performed, and the type of big win is also determined. conduct. As the types of jackpot determined here, a 15R normal jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot, and a 2R probability variable jackpot are prepared. The jackpot pattern displayed on the LED 37b is a pattern indicating the type of the jackpot (in this embodiment, "9" for the 15R normal jackpot, "7" for the 15R variable jackpot, and "3" for the 2R variable jackpot, for example. Is displayed).

Here, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. It is the winning that the game is set. "15R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (Fig. 8(b)) for high probability, which will be described later, is set. That is. "2R probability variable jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of two rounds, and after the jackpot, a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8(b)) for high probability, which will be described later, is set. That is.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 79 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the third pattern (the first A third symbol display device 81 is provided which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of special symbols and second special symbols.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that the left side as shown in FIG. Three symbol rows, left, middle and right, showing the first special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, are displayed in the display area Dm1. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on the left side display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81 ( dynamic display). In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is A decorative display is made according to the situation. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Also, the second special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, is displayed in the right display area Dm2 in the same manner as the first special symbol.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 5(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 5(b) is a diagram exemplifying the pending symbol display before and after sorting on the actual display screen.

The third symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are composed of 10 types of special symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is mainly divided into upper and lower parts, and third symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in the upper display area Dm. and a display area for displaying reserved symbols (the number of reserved symbols in the first lottery game and the second lottery game) in the lower display area Ds. The upper display area Dm is divided into a left display area Dm1 and a right display area Dm2 so that they can be displayed. Mainly, the left side display area Dm1 variably displays the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game based on the winning to the first starting port 63a. On the other hand, the right display area Dm2 variably displays the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game based on the winning to the second starting port 63b.

In the left display area Dm1, three pattern lines L1, L2 and L3 are displayed on the left, middle and right. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, and each of the symbol rows L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row L1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row L2 and the right symbol row L3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order. On the other hand, in the right display area Dm2, the symbol rows R1, R2, and R3 are displayed in the same manner as the first special symbols, and the variable display is similarly performed.

Further, the third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line U1 in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided longer than the upper display area Dm, and is evenly divided into eight small reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 in the horizontal direction.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 5(b), a total of three main symbols of special symbols (third symbols) are displayed in the upper display area Dm, and displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2. be.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b is suspended up to four times, respectively. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 63a while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the start of the first lottery game based on the winning is suspended, and the suspended symbol display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds is displayed. ) in the area where the reserved pattern is not displayed, the reserved pattern display area with the youngest number (the reserved pattern display area on the left), the reserved pattern of the first lottery game "○" is displayed. .

In addition, when the game ball wins the second starting port 63b while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, similarly to the case of winning the first starting port 63a, the pending symbol of the second lottery game "●" is displayed at the bottom. It is displayed in the reserved design display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the side display area Ds.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. When a game ball enters the distribution winning device 630, the game ball is distributed in order to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution member 640 (see FIG. 4). When the first starting port 63a is won in a state where the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and in a state where there is no hold in the first lottery game, whether the second special symbol is being variable displayed or not. Regardless, the first special symbol is stop-displayed after being variably displayed in the left display area Dm1. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 63b, the second special symbol is variably displayed regardless of whether or not the first special symbol is variably displayed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously variably displayed in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2, respectively. Therefore, by distributing the winning game balls alternately to the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b by the distribution winning device 630, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be efficiently executed. can. As will be described later, since the first lottery game and the second lottery game each execute a lottery as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game, the lottery opportunity for the jackpot game may be executed only in the first lottery game. In comparison, it is possible to increase the number of lotteries and increase the chances of a player getting a big win.

Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 configured with two of the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described, but not limited thereto, three, four, or more lottery games and corresponding start-up Of course, it is also possible to provide respective openings and at the same time enable variable display of the respective lottery results.

In this embodiment, the distribution winning device 630 has a mechanical configuration (distribution of game balls by the passive distribution member 640). It is of course possible to alternately distribute the start timing of the first lottery game and the start timing of the second lottery game. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for distributing game balls on the game board surface, and the game area can be effectively utilized.

When a game ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, a first start port switch or a second start port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the first starter switch and the second starter switch, the main controller 110 draws a lottery for a big win, and the first pattern display device 37 displays the result of the lottery. Also, the first starting hole 63a and the second starting hole 63b are also one of winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win.

When one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a big hit, and if the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable display, the variable display is temporarily interrupted and the jackpot game ( For example, in the case of a 15-round normal jackpot, after the 15-round jackpot game is completed, the variable display of the special symbols is continued for the remaining variable time.

The variable display for the remaining variable time is displayed in a variable mode exclusively for the remaining variable display so that the player can recognize the remaining variable display for the interrupted variable display. Further, as the variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display, a variation display mode matching the remaining variation time is selected. Specifically, when the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or less than the reference time (three seconds or less in the present embodiment), the characters "The lottery result of the temporarily stopped fluctuation display will be displayed!" After displaying on the 3-symbol display device 81 for the remaining variation time, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the judgment result. Then, when the determination result is stopped and displayed, the character "The lottery result of the temporarily stopped variable display has been displayed!" is displayed and continues to be displayed until the next variable is started.

On the other hand, if the remaining variation time is longer than the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), all the main symbols that make up the special symbols are variably displayed at a constant speed, and the character "temporarily stopped variation" is displayed. Display is changing!” is displayed. After that, when the remaining variation time elapses, the main symbols are stopped and displayed all at once with the symbols indicating the determination result.

With this configuration, the player can recognize the continuation of the interrupted variable display of the special symbols, and can recognize the lottery result of the interrupted variable display. can. Therefore, even if the variable display is interrupted in the middle, the player can be prevented from playing the game while having dissatisfaction or doubt that the lottery has disappeared in the middle.

Further, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a big hit, if the other special symbol is in a state where the variable display is stopped, a new variable display is performed. is prohibited from starting. When the jackpot game ends, the variable display is again set to be able to start based on the winning to the corresponding starting ports 63a and 63b.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the lottery game is executed in the other special symbol even during the big win and the occurrence of the big win is overlapped, and the trouble that the player cannot concentrate on the big win game.

In addition, when the remaining variation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted variation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player overlooks it or cannot understand the notification result because it is too short. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the player is notified that the lottery result will be displayed immediately, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result has been displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, characters are displayed to notify that the interrupted variable display has been stopped, so if the remaining variable time is very short (for example, within 1 second). Also, the player can recognize that the interrupted variable display is valid and the determination result is displayed still.

Further, even when the remaining variation time is longer than the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the player is notified that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is being displayed in a variable manner. A person can easily recognize that the interrupted variable display was effective without disappearing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the interrupted variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is to be resumed, the player is notified to that effect by text. Alternatively, a lamp or the like may be used to notify the operator. In addition, it is possible to display suspended fluctuations, such as a display mode that lets the player know that the fluctuation display has been resumed (for example, an animation that informs that the character, etc., has resumed the suspended fluctuation display). Of course, the notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to restarting the display. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the interrupted variable display has been resumed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit, and when the other special symbol is being variably displayed, the variative display is interrupted. However, not limited to this, while the measurement of the variable time is interrupted during the big win game, the variable display of the special symbols is continued as it is, and the remaining variable time is measured after the big win game. may be resumed and the special symbols may be displayed in a variable manner.

With such a configuration, the special symbols are continuously variably displayed even during the jackpot game, so that the player can confirm that the other variable display will continue without disappearing. A big win game can be played with peace of mind.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol becomes a big hit, the variable display is interrupted if the other special symbol is in the variable display. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display is continued without being interrupted and the lottery game is executed as usual.

By constructing in this way, it becomes possible to perform more lottery games even during the jackpot game, and more lottery games can be played in a short period of time, so that many lottery games can be played by the players. can be done. In addition, in such a configuration, when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a win during a jackpot game, the execution of the jackpot game is delayed (stocked) until one jackpot game is completed. ), the player can continuously play the jackpot game.

Further, in this embodiment, the interrupted variable display mode of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the variable mode dedicated to the remaining variable display. Not limited to this, the remaining variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 may also be displayed in a variation mode dedicated to the remaining variation display. Specifically, when the remaining variable display is to be performed on the 7-segment display 37b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed while blinking. Alternatively, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed by lighting the remaining variable display colors (for example, blue, etc.). By doing so, not only the third symbol display device 81, but also the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the 7-segment display 37b can display the remaining variable display to the player. can be notified.

Further, similarly to the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variation display mode may naturally be changed according to the remaining variation time.

Further, during the interruption, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed blinking in a predetermined display mode "for example, alphabet h" in a stopped state at a predetermined period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted).

A horizontally long rectangular variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the game area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery relating to the jackpot of the first lottery game or the second lottery game in the main control device 110 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the first jackpot stop pattern is set. The symbol display device 37 is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed in the corresponding display area (left display area Dm1 or right display area Dm2) of the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. . After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening/closing operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is determined by the type of the determined jackpot. For example, in the case of a 15R normal jackpot, the opening/closing operation can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a privilege game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a value in the game (game value). is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65, based on winning the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a symbol indicating winning, The opening/closing operation is set based on the jackpot type, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time or until a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won). be done.

The variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate covering the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. . The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that do not win any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 65a, 79 are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch (Fig. 3, 122). ing. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The main controller 110 executes major processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result lottery of the second symbol display unit 88. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in order to set the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display unit 88, and the like. used in

For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, a special pattern random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a special prize type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot pattern are used. , a variation pattern determination counter C3, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. Also, a normal winning random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols (second symbol display portion 88), and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14). It is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Details will be described later, but in the RAM 203, each counter value is stored with respect to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 and the second starting port 63b, in which each counter value is stored with respect to the winning with respect to the first starting port 63a. A second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 is provided. In this embodiment, up to four holding balls are provided in each of the first starting hole 63a and the second starting hole 63b, and a total of up to eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first starting port 63a during the period when the special symbol lottery is possible, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display or when the special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is obtained. is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1, and when the game ball wins the second start port 63b, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2. On the other hand, during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, etc., during the period when the special symbol lottery is impossible, the game ball is placed in the first start port 63a or When the second starting opening 63b wins, if the number of pending starting openings for the winning starting opening is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired, and the winning starting opening is stored in the corresponding first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. In addition, if the number of reserved balls for the winning starting port is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) or more, each counter value etc. is not acquired and prize balls (in this embodiment, 5 game balls ) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of retained balls is set to 4 for each of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b. You may choose not to make any

Each counter shown in FIG. 7 will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-399, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-399. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b (start win). At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 corresponding to the winning starting opening of the RAM203. The value of the random number for the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 8(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that will be a big hit (in this embodiment, "7" when the probability is low, and "0 to 9" when the probability is high), it is determined as a big win.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 399. In this special winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (winning values) to be a big hit is 1 when the probability is low, the value "7" is 10 when the probability is high, and the value "0 to 9" is the big hit. It is stored in the random number table 202a.

The special hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, and is sequentially added by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in this embodiment) It is configured to return to 0 after reaching . The value of the special hit type counter C2, for example, is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball wins the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b (start win) At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning starting hole.

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 is not a random number that becomes a big hit, that is, it is a random number that will be out. For example, the variation pattern in the variable display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 is a random number that becomes a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and stop in the fluctuation display effect The type will be the one at the time of the jackpot. In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c.

The value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the special hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 8(c)) stored in the ROM202. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the ROM 202 stores various tables. FIG. 8(b) schematically shows an example of the first jackpot random number counter table 202a, and FIG. 8(c) shows an example of the jackpot type table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(c)) is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the special hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As described above, the jackpot types include the "15R normal jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(b)) is set after the jackpot game with a low probability. "15R probability variable jackpot" in which a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(b)) is set for when the number of rounds is 15 rounds and the jackpot game is high probability, and the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds and the probability is high after the jackpot game. There is a "2R probability variable jackpot" in which the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(b)) for time is set.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8(c), the value of the special hit type counter C2 "60 to 99" is associated with the 15R normal jackpot, and the value of the special hit type counter C2 "0 to 49" is associated with the 15R probability variable jackpot. , and the value "50 to 59" of the special hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variable jackpot.

When the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is a value that becomes a big hit, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2. The jackpot type associated with the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "20", the 15R probability variable jackpot is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is "80", the 15R normal jackpot) is used as the jackpot type. It is determined.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of about 40%, the 15R variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 50%, and the 2R variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 10%. The jackpot type table 202b is defined so as to be selected.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters continues. The fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Further, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 100, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 100).

The values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball is the first starting port 63a or the second starting port At the timing of winning (starting winning) 63b, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable display, and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. When the various counter values of the reserved balls are not stored, they are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c1 or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c2 of the RAM203.

FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal time special per variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10(a), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d is set to the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability in the jackpot random number table 202a (hereinafter referred to as the normal game state ), 15R normal jackpot and 15R variable variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as 15R jackpot) and 2R variable variable jackpot referred when the 15R jackpot is determined as the jackpot type 15R jackpot dedicated and 2R variable variable jackpot referred when the 2R variable jackpot is determined It is divided into groups (groups) based on the 2R probability variable jackpot dedicated to be referred to when is determined, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups. When the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is a value (hit value) that becomes a jackpot, it is stored in the execution area according to the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area. A variation pattern group is selected from the variation pattern group corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 stored in the execution area.

The 15R jackpot has various types of normal reach, various types of super reach, and various types of premier reach. ~100. A variety of no-reach reach is a reach with a short fluctuation time, and after that short reach, the first pattern (or third pattern) is aligned (so-called, the patterns are aligned at the end of the bitterness). A variety of super reach is a variation pattern. , The first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned after the reach of the fluctuation time longer than the normal reach (for example, the reach that develops from the long reach and normal reach). After reaching the time, the first pattern (or the third pattern) is aligned (for example, the reach that develops further after the super reach and the special reach that develops from the normal reach is different from the super reach). This is a variation pattern that is not selected in the case of .

In addition, "various types of reach" means that there are many different effects in each reach. There is a reach that is suddenly displayed, and there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as those with a notice effect before the start of the variable display, and those with a re-variable display that will be a big hit.

In the case of the 2R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3. The 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern is a special variation pattern that, for example, stops the special symbol at "341" and informs that the 2R probability variation has been won.

FIG. 10(b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal-time special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10(b), the normal time special loss variation pattern table 202e has a variety of normal failures that are completely off as a stop type at the time of failure during the normal game state, and normal reach with a relatively short variation time among normal reach failures. It consists of various types of normal reach (short) that are out of reach, various types of normal reach (long) that are out of normal reach with a relatively long fluctuation time, and various types of super reach that are out of super reach.

The correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and each fluctuation pattern group is that when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 29", normal reach is different, and when it is "30 to 60", normal reach (short ) various, when it is "61 to 89", various normal reach (long) is determined, and when it is "90 to 100", various super reach is determined.

For each type of normal deviation, normal deviation A and normal deviation B are set in which fluctuation display is completed in a short time and reach is not established. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 100", the normal deviation A is selected, and when the value is "101 to 198", the normal deviation B variation pattern is selected. In addition, normal reach short fluctuation patterns A to C are set for various types of normal reach (short), in which the reach is established but the fluctuation time is short. When the value of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is "0 to 70", when the normal short reach A is "71 to 128", when the normal short reach B is "129 to 198" , the normal reach short C fluctuation pattern is selected. Similarly, variation patterns are selected for various normal reach lengths and various super reach lengths.

FIG. 11(a) is a diagram schematically showing a time saving/probability variation special hit variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. FIG. Moreover, FIG.11(b) is the figure which showed typically the time reduction use and probability variable special deviation fluctuation|variation pattern table 202e memorize|stored in ROM202. The time saving/probability special hit variation pattern table 202d and the time saving/probability special hit loss variation pattern table are set in the jackpot random number table 202a when the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability is set (hereinafter referred to as game The state is a probability variable gaming state), and when a value of "0" or more is set in the time saving counter 203k (hereinafter, the game state is a time saving gaming state). .

Since the selection of the variation pattern is the same as the normal special hit variation pattern table 202d and the normal special out variation pattern table 202e, description thereof is omitted. In addition, as for the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d and the special off fluctuation pattern table 202e, only one type was described here, but the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d and the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d dedicated for the first special design and the second special design respectively A deviation variation pattern table 202e is set, and the distribution of the variation pattern determination counter C3 is changed between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol So, even if the value of the same fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 is acquired, the same fluctuation pattern is not selected. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to select different variation patterns between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and it is possible to perform various effects.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters continues. The normal hit random number counter C4 (see FIG. 8(d)) is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, it is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 7) of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the normal symbol is set by the normal symbol random number table 202c (FIG. 8(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is set. , When it matches with the value of the random number set by the random number table 202c per normal symbol, it is determined as a normal symbol hit.

Further, when the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. The value of the normal random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) in this embodiment, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (through gate). . The number of random numbers to be won is 24 in the normal game state, and the range is "5 to 28". In addition, in the high probability game state, it is 200, and the range is "5 to 204". That is, in the normal game state, it is determined that the player wins when the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28", and in the high probability gaming state, the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is determined. is in the range of "5 to 204", the second symbol display portion 88 lights up a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the normal electric accessory 64 is displayed. The blades 64a and 64b are opened twice for a predetermined time (1.2 s in this embodiment) in the normal game state and for a predetermined time (1 s in this embodiment) in the high probability game state. The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (S1200) (see FIG. 33).

When the game ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being changed and displayed and each counter value based on the reserved ball is not stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, A random value is obtained from the normal winning random number counter C4 in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i and stored in the normal winning random number counter storage area 203i1. In addition, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner or the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) is stored in the normal per random number counter storage area 203h1 of the number of times of suspension (normal symbol retention 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number obtained from the normal per random number counter C4. In addition, when the random number is stored in each area, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to ON, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the random number is stopped, or the one previous suspension is performed by digesting the suspension. It is set to off when data is shifted into the area. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal design flag of the newly shifted and stored reservation area is set to ON. Determination of whether or not data is stored in the reserved area or whether or not the normal design is displayed in a variable manner is executed by whether or not the normal design flag of which reserved area or execution area is turned on.

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second symbol display section 88 can be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select common various counter values, but the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery Different counters are set for each game (second special symbol), and update timings and initial values of the various counters are different between the first lottery game and the second lottery game, thereby updating with different values. Of course, it may be composed of the counter value to be used.

By configuring in this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is acquired at the same opportunity, the counter value of a different value can be acquired. It is possible to suppress the problem that the fluctuation pattern selected in the 1 special design and the 2nd special design and the judgment result of the success or failure are synchronized.

In addition, even if a variation pattern is selected from a common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the problem of synchronizing the selected variation patterns is suppressed, and various performances are provided. It can be performed. In addition, data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM with a small storage area, etc.) can be achieved.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I/O buffer. and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main process (S1200) (see FIG. 33) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

The RAM 203 stores a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, a second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, and a number of first special symbol reserved balls. counter 203e, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i, normal symbol flag 203j, time saving counter 203k, variable flag 203m, 1st jackpot flag 203o, 2nd jackpot flag 203p, 1st fluctuation stop flag 203q, 2nd fluctuation stop flag 203r, 1st fluctuation time storage area 203s, 2nd fluctuation time storage area 203t, rearrangement pending storage area 203u, etc. It has at least a memory area 203v.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on the winning of the first starting port 63a up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). be. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores various counter values obtained based on the game balls winning the second starting port 63b up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment). This is a storage area for

The first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol. When various counter values are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, this is a storage area in which the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d is a storage area for storing various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol, and the details are the same as the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c. .

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d are used for the counter upon detection of start winning. Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 obtained from the buffer (see FIG. 7) is stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first starting port 63a in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer, Stored in the special hit random number counter storage area 203a1, the special hit type counter storage area 203a2, the variation pattern determination counter 203a3, and the variation type counter storage area 203a4 of the reserved ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second starting port 63b, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer, and each corresponding value is obtained. Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the above-described first Of the data corresponding to each start winning stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (each value of the counters C1 to C3, CS1), it corresponds to one start winning. The data is shifted to this special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are the first start detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning to the opening 63a or the second starting opening 63b, the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) Each is a counter that counts up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process (FIG. 32, S1112) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed.

Also, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is the counter value in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 63a. is stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the first special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 . The first special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 each time the starting winning is detected and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. is.

Also, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (that is, the number of reserved balls) is the counter value in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 63b. is stored, the voice lamp controller 113 is notified by the second special symbol reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110 . The second special symbol reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1. is.

MPU201, when the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d, Refer to the data stored in the 1 special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c or the second special symbol reserved ball execution area 203d in the first fluctuation start process (FIG. 16, S203) or the second fluctuation start process (FIG. 20, S206). Then, a big winning lottery is conducted based on the reference data, and a variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, a variable display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

Further, the variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or second variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variable display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g detects the normal symbol start port 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning prize"). (referred to as "")), the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (the second symbol display unit 88 of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display effect performed by the second symbol display device 88) It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of standby times) up to a maximum of 4 times. This normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the game balls passing through the normal symbol starting port 67.例文帳に追加Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process (FIG. 32, S1112) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display effect is executed (see FIG. 29, S106).

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is a storage area in which a normal winning random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning to the normal symbol start port 67 is stored. When the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 detects that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), the normal winning random number counter C4 is detected from the counter buffer. A value is acquired and stored in the normal per random number counter storage area 203h1 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h. The normal design flag 203j is set to ON in the normal design flag storage area 203h2 and stored (stored). The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h has four reserved areas so that the data corresponding to one start winning (the value of the counter C4, the normal symbol flag 203j) can be stored (reserved) up to four times. there is In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, the data of the reserved balls are stored in the order of passing through the normal symbol start port 67 (start winning) in order from the reserved area with the earliest digested order among the reserved areas where the data is vacant. be done.

In addition, when the normal symbol holding ball execution area 203i detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display effect of the normal symbol based on the starting prize, each counter value is stored, and the winning lottery of the normal symbol and the first It is a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of the display (variation pattern) of the pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the variable display effect of the normal symbols, the winning lottery and the setting of the display of the second symbol display unit 88 or the second symbol display device 88 are executed. 2, out of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h (the value of the normal winning random number counter C4), the data corresponding to one starting prize is stored in this normal symbol reserved ball. Shift to execution area 203i. It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal symbol flag 203j is a flag indicating that the data of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored and reserved, and is a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being variably displayed. When the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i or the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h, it is set to ON. Also, when the value of the normal per counter C4 is shifted to the next reservation area (the reservation area corresponding to the number of reservations that has been consumed and the number of reservations is reduced by one), the reservation area before being shifted The normal design flag 203j is set to OFF, while the normal design flag 203j of the reserved area shifted and stored is set to ON. In addition, when the variation display of the normal symbol is processed to stop the variation, the normal symbol flag 203j is set to OFF.

The time saving counter 203k is a counter area in which the number of time saving times 100 is set after the 15R normal jackpot game is executed. When the number of times of time saving is set, a random number table per normal symbol for high probability is set in the random number table per normal symbol 202c until the number of times of time saving is set to 0. Further, when the symbol "○" indicating the winning of the normal symbol is displayed in the second symbol display portion 88, the wings 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 are opened for a longer time than the normal game state (in this embodiment, , 1s) The opening operation is repeated twice. This game state is hereinafter referred to as a time-saving game state.

The time reduction counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed and stopped, and when the value of the time reduction counter 203k becomes 0, the time reduction game state shifts to the normal game state, and the normal symbol. When the normal symbol winning random number table for the low probability of the winning random number counter 202c is set and the symbol "○" indicating the winning of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display section 88, the open time is 0.2 s. The blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 are opened by setting the number of times of opening to one.

The variable probability flag 203m is a flag indicating that the game state is a high probability game state. In the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it is notified that the 15R probability variable jackpot game has been won, and when the 15R probability variable jackpot game is executed, the flag that is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game. is. On the other hand, the variable probability flag 203m is set to ON, and when the first special symbol or the second special symbol indicating a big hit (all types) is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF, and after the big win game, according to the big win type, If it is a 15R probability variable jackpot or a 2R probability variable jackpot, it is set to ON.

The first jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the obtained value of the special winning random number counter C1 is a win based on the winning of the first starting port 63a. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF.

The second jackpot flag 203p is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that the obtained value of the special winning random number counter C1 is a win based on the winning of the second starting port 63b. Also, when the jackpot game ends, it is set to OFF.

The first fluctuation stop flag 203q is a flag indicating that the jackpot judgment of the second special symbol is determined to be a win while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is set to ON in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S717) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Also, in the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 19, S603), when the variation display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, it is set to OFF.

The second stop flag 203r is a flag indicating that it is determined that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a hit while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is set to ON in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S407) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. Also, in the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 23, S803), the variation display of the second special symbol is set to OFF when the temporary stop processing is executed.

The first variation time storage area 203s is a storage area in which the variation time of the first special symbol is counted (measured). The first variable time storage area 203s counts the variable time (counts the number of interrupts) when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, and the variable time (2 ms per one interrupt) is measured.

The second variation time storage area 203t is a storage area in which the variation time of the second special symbol is counted (measured). The second variable time storage area 203t counts the variable time (counts the number of interrupts) when the second special symbol starts to vary, and measures the variable time (2 ms per one interrupt).

In the present embodiment, the first variable time storage area 203s and the second variable time storage area 203t measure the variable time by counting the number of interrupts. After that, the clock data may be obtained at any time to measure the fluctuation time. Further, it is of course possible to store the variable time for variable display in advance and subtract the value from time to time.

The rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area for storing each determination result determined based on each data of the reservation areas 1 to 4 stored in the .

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram schematically showing the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u. The rearrangement pending storage area 203u corresponds to a pending data storage area in which each determination data corresponding to each pending number of pending areas 1 to 8 is stored, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol during variable display. It is composed of a changing data storage area in which each determination data to be stored is stored.

Each of the pending data holding areas 1 to 8 includes a winning judgment result storage area 203u1, a jackpot type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern type storage area 203u3, a variation order storage area 203u4, a variation start time storage area 203u5, and a prefetch probability variation flag 203u6. are provided respectively. The reserved areas 1 to 8 are stored in order from the reserved area 1 in the order in which the respective reserved balls were established (total establishment order combining the first start opening 63a and the second start opening 63b). In other words, the reserved areas 1 to 8 show the establishment order in which the reserved balls are established by combining the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol in the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

In the variable display data storage area, a success/fail determination result storage area 203u1, a jackpot type storage area 203u2, a variation pattern storage area 203u3, and a prefetch probability variation flag 203u6 are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914), the propriety determination result storage area 203u1 stores the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a storage area for storing the result of pre-determining whether the special hit random number counter C1 stored in .

The jackpot type storage area 203u2 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). It is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special hit type counter C2 is stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 203u3 stores the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). is a storage area for storing the type of variation pattern determined based on the various data stored in the . This variation pattern is data that can identify whether the variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data of the reservation area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data to identify whether the data is

The variable display order storage area 203u4 stores the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area for storing the actual variable display start order in the reserved areas 1 to 8 determined based on the various data stored in . Specifically, the fluctuation display start order is determined by calculating the fluctuation start time of the newly stored held ball and comparing it with the fluctuation start time of each held ball previously stored. .

The fluctuation start time storage area 203u5 is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area for storing the time until each data in the reserved areas 1 to 8 actually starts the variable display, which is calculated based on the various data stored in . It should be noted that once this variable display start time is stored in the reserved area, it is updated at any time during other processing (S112) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main control unit 110. FIG.

The look-ahead probability variation flag storage area 203u6 predicts that the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 203k2 is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot in the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S933), which will be described later (determined in advance ) is set to ON and stored. In addition, the look-ahead probability variation flag storage area 203u6 is set to OFF, because every time data is shifted to a higher reservation area and stored, the area before the shift is cleared to 0. That is, the prefetch probability variation flag storage area 203u6 that has been set to ON once is shifted to the changing data storage area, and is set to OFF by overwriting (shifting) new data in the changing data storage area. . Also, when the game machine is powered on and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial value is set to OFF.

Each data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is backed up and stored in a backup area (not shown) of the RAM 203 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. Then, when the power is turned on again, it is read from the stored backup area and set.

The other memory area 203v is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. FIG.

In this way, when a game ball enters the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b and a reserved ball is generated, each of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b is combined according to the establishment order of the reserved balls. Various determination data of the ball on hold is stored. Therefore, when the winning command is generated based on the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, the audio lamp control device 113 establishes a pending combination of the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the winning command. Commands can be generated to be output to the display controller 114 to display the pending symbols in order. Therefore, the reserved design display of the first special design and the second special design can be displayed on the third design display device 81 in the order of establishment of the reservation combining the first special design and the second special design.

In addition, since the variable display start order of each hold is also discriminated and stored in relation to the establishment order, by generating a winning command based on the variable display start order, even the audio lamp control device 113 receives Based on the received winning command, it is possible to determine the order in which each hold is established and the actual order in which the variable display is started.

In addition, since the change start time of each hold is stored in each hold area and the time is managed (updated according to the passage of time), the order of starting the change display of the newly stored hold data can be easily changed. can be discriminated.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display unit 88, and a specific winning opening 65a which is driven to open and close forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. A solenoid 209 including a large-opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253. FIG.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and outputs variable display effects ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as variable display). The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the symbols are displayed in the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The voice output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed to rearrange and display the pending symbol displays in the order of start of the variable display.

Also, the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 213 . In the pachinko machine 10, since the prize winning to the prize winning port is an important factor for determining the game state, it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration to prevent the intentional prize winning to the prize winning port. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 has been vibrated by a player or the like, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114 to convey the vibration error. In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the error type. Send to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, a first fluctuation start flag 223c1, a second fluctuation start flag 223c2, a second 1 stop type selection flag 223d1, 2nd stop type selection flag 223d2, secondary 1st fluctuation stop flag 223e, secondary 2nd fluctuation stop flag 223f, secondary 1st fluctuation restart flag 223g, secondary 2nd fluctuation restart flag 223h, secondary 1st At least a variable time storage area 223i, a secondary second variable time storage area 223j, a secondary rearranged storage area 223k, and a miscellaneous memory area 223m are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until the commands are processed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 36) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out and is read by the command determination processing. , the command is parsed and an action is taken according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1, like the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is the first special symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a variable display (dynamic display) of patterns, and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display effect suspended in the main control device 110 up to four times.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2, like the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, is the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a variable display (dynamic display) of patterns, and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable display effect suspended in the main control device 110 up to four times.

The first variation start flag 223c1 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1502). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1602).

The second variation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to ON when the second variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. (FIG. 36, S1505). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1602).

The first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to ON when the first stop type command for notifying the variation stop type of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1612).

The second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON when the second stop type command for notifying the variation stop type of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received (FIG. 36, S1508). On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 38, S1612).

The secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is a flag indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. It is set to ON when a temporary first fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110 (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1702).

The secondary second fluctuation stop flag 223f is a flag indicating that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. It is set to ON when a temporary second fluctuation stop command is received from main controller 110 (FIG. 36, S1516). On the other hand, when the process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1706).

The secondary first fluctuation restart flag 223g is a flag indicating that the temporarily stopped fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted. When the first special symbol variation restart command is received from the main controller 110, the slave first restart flag 223g is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the first special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1710).

The secondary second fluctuation restart flag 223h is a flag indicating that the temporarily stopped fluctuation display of the second special symbol is restarted. When the second special symbol variation restart command is received from the main controller 110, the slave second restart flag 223h is set to ON (FIG. 36, S1518). On the other hand, when the process of restarting the variable display of the second special symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is executed, it is set to OFF (FIG. 39, S1714).

The secondary first variation time storage area 223i is a storage area in which a value obtained by measuring the variation time of the first special symbol is stored. This is a storage area in which a value synchronized with the first variable time storage area 203s of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is stored. Based on the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms and the actual fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is stored.

The secondary second variation time storage area 223j is a storage area in which the value obtained by measuring the variation time of the second special symbol is stored. This is a storage area in which a value synchronized with the second variable time storage area 203t of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is stored. Based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, 1 is added every 1 ms and the actual variable display time is stored.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area 223k stores the same data as the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 based on the winning command output from the main controller 110. is a storage area that is stored based on a winning command output from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 .

FIG. 9(b) is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k. The secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k stores the pending data pending areas from the pending area 1 to the pending area 8 and various data of the first special pattern and the second special pattern that are being variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81. and a storage area for data during variable display. Each reservation area includes a win/fail determination result storage area 223k1, a jackpot type storage area 223k2, a variation pattern type storage area 223k3, a variation order storage area 223k4, a variation start time storage area 223k5, a prefetch probability variation flag storage area 223k6, and a rearrangement flag 223k7. , and each data extracted from the received winning command is stored in the corresponding reservation area. Also, each time a display variation pattern command for starting variable display of special symbols is generated, the data in the reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is shifted to the previous reserved area and stored. In the case of the first special design, the reserved data in the reserved area 1 is stored in the storage area of the changing data of the first special design, and in the case of the second special design, the changing data of the second special design. Each is shifted and stored in the storage area.

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914), the propriety determination result storage area 223k1 stores the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a storage area for extracting and storing the result of pre-determining whether the special winning random number counter C1 stored in . The information of the winning judgment result extracted from the winning command is stored in one of the holding areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the number of holdings (corresponding holding area of the rearrangement holding storage area 203u of the main control unit 110). 223k1.

The jackpot type storage area 223k2 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area in which the jackpot type determined by the stored special winning type counter C2 is extracted from the received winning command and stored.

The variation pattern type storage area 223k3 stores the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area for extracting and storing the type of variation pattern determined based on the various data stored in the received winning command. This variation pattern is data that can identify whether the variation pattern is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the data of the reservation area is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is also used as data to identify whether the data is

The variation order storage area 223k4 is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). This is a storage area for extracting and storing the actual variable display start order in the discriminated reservation areas 1 to 8 from the received prize winning command based on various stored data.

The fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 is the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b in the first look-ahead process (Fig. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (Fig. 27, S914). This is a storage area that extracts and stores the time until each data of the reserved areas 1 to 8 that is calculated based on the various data stored in the storage area actually starts the variable display from the received winning command. . When this variable display start time is stored in the reservation area, it is updated as needed in the reservation number display processing (FIG. 35, S1406) of the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. be.

In the present embodiment, the winning command is a command indicating the time until the calculated data of the reservation areas 1 to 8 actually start to change display. Each counter value for calculating the time (for example, the type of variation pattern selected, the counter value for calculating the remaining variation time of the special symbol during variation (number of interruptions, etc.)) and the start of variation display The command may correspond to the time until .

The predictive reading probability variable flag storage area 223k6 is a storage area that is set to ON and stored when the type of the stored jackpot type storage area 223k2 is the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 2R probability variable jackpot.

The rearrangement flag 223k7 indicates that the player has operated the frame button 22 to request rearrangement of the reserved design display (the reserved design display displayed when the frame button 22 is operated). is a flag.

Thus, when a game ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63a and a reserved ball is generated, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are based on the data extracted from the winning command. Various judgment data of each held ball are stored according to the establishment order of the held ball. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k, the display control device so as to perform the reservation design display in the order of establishment of the reservation combining the first special design and the second special design. 114 can be generated. Therefore, the reserved design display of the first special design and the second special design can be displayed on the third design display device 81 in the order of establishment of the reservation combining the first special design and the second special design.

In addition, based on the prize winning command, the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k is updated with data synchronized with the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the main control unit 110, and there is a change in pending data (establishment of a new hold, etc.). can also be sequentially updated by synchronizing the data.

The other memory area 223m is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 provided with a . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22).

When a power failure occurs, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores each data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u in the backup area of the RAM 203 as backup data. Then, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 again, each backed-up data in the sorting reserve storage area 203u is read out from the backup area, and each corresponding reserve area or variable in the sorting reserve storage area 203u is read out from the backup area. Stored in the data storage area.

Then, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), similar to the winning command generated in the first prefetch update process (FIG. 26, S939), based on the rearrangement pending storage area 203u in which the backed-up data is read and stored All winning commands are generated and output to the sound lamp control device 113, so that data synchronized with the same sorting pending storage area 203u is set in the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k as well.

Also, in the start-up process (FIG. 32), by transmitting the winning command to the sound lamp control device 113, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u and the sub-sorting pending storage area 223k can be stored even when the power failure is restored. Although the configuration for synchronizing has been described, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, stores each data in the sub-reordering reservation storage area 223k in the RAM 223 when a power failure occurs. Naturally, it may be configured to be stored as .

The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 is activated when the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) (see FIG. 3) is pressed when the power is turned on (the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is being pressed). This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the backup data is cleared. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 performs control processing such as detection of winning of special symbols and ordinary symbols, and various lotteries such as winning and selection of variation patterns for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably execute the control of the pachinko machine 10, the sub-control The control load of the main controller 110 can be reduced by having the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, which corresponds to the device, perform the control.

The control boards of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are covered by a box called a board box, which consists of a base member and a cover member made of transparent plastic. The board box is caulked by a tamper-proof member called a "sealing member" so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. In general, when the base member and the lid member are fitted together, the sealing member is formed by inserting a pin-shaped sealing member (or It is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member only by a method that leaves an unsealing mark, such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member. .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231 , a work RAM 233 , a ROM 234 , an image controller 237 , an input port 238 , an output port 239 and bus lines 240 and 241 .

The output side of the audio lamp controller 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different jackpot lottery probabilities and the number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

Below, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed according to the control program stored in the ROM 234 .

As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234 . The ROM 234 is also connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 , and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 . The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 at any time, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 .

When a game ball enters the distribution device 630, is distributed by the passive distribution member 640, and wins the game ball in the first start port 63a, each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1) is acquired, and the acquisition After the lottery and the variation pattern are determined based on each counter value obtained, the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first lottery game is performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Variable display (dynamic display) is performed. Further, when a game ball enters the sorting device 630 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game ball is sorted by the passive sorting device 640 and enters the second starting port 63b. When the game ball enters the second starting port 63b, each counter value (C1-C3 and CS1) are acquired, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed at the same time. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, among the two 7-segment LEDs of the 7-segment display 37b, the left 7-segment LED performs a variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the right 7-segment LED performs a variable display. In the segment LED, a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 5(a), the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol is executed in the left display area Dm1, and the second special symbol is displayed in the right display area Dm2. A variable display corresponding to the symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed, and the player can efficiently execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game. .

When the game ball wins in the first start port 63a while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable display (a state in which the remaining variable time is set), each counter value (C1 to C3 and CS1 ), the first lottery game for variably displaying the lottery result cannot be executed immediately, so each counter value is stored (memorized) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a mode indicating the number of reserved first special symbols "1" of the plurality of light emitting diodes 37a of the first symbol display device 37 (for example, one The light-emitting diode lights up in red). When each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is updated (the number of reserved balls is added by 1).

The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 outputs a winning command to the voice lamp controller 113 when each counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In the winning command, it is possible to identify which one of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b has won, and it is possible to identify the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls).

When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning command command, it extracts the pending number from the received command, the pending information such as the information on the winning starting port, etc. Based on the pending information, the third symbol display device In 81, a process of displaying a reserved design in the corresponding reserved design display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds is executed. As shown in FIG. 5(b), if this reserved design is a reserved design corresponding to the reserved information of the first special design (first start port 63a), the second special design (second start If it is a reserved design corresponding to the reserved information of the mouth 63b), "●" is displayed for each reserved information (one reserved design for one reserved).

Similarly, when the game ball wins the second starting port 63b while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display (a state in which the remaining variable time is set), each counter value is acquired, and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is updated. Then, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a suspended symbol indicating that the suspended information is stored.

The reserved symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are respectively displayed in a comprehensive prize winning order in which the game balls that have won the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b are combined. One example shown in FIG. 12 will be specifically described. First, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are being variably displayed, the first special symbol has the remaining 10 seconds of variation time, and the second special symbol has the remaining 5 seconds of variation time. showing. In the lower display area Ds of the third design display device 81, the reserved design " ” indicates that the reserved symbol display area Ds2 is the reserved information of the first special symbol, and the reserved symbol “○” indicates that the reserved symbol display area Ds3 is the reserved information of the second special symbol. ●” is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4, and a reserved symbol “◯” indicating that the reserved information is the first special symbol is displayed. In this case, it is indicated that the winning order of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b is from the reserved design display area Ds1 to the reserved design display area Ds4 in order from the earliest.

That is, after the game ball enters the second start port 63b, it enters the first start port 63a, then the second start port 63b, and then the game ball enters the first start port 63a. It shows that

As shown in FIG. 12, in each hold data, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected when the hold becomes the start of fluctuation is predicted and stored in advance (the type of fluctuation pattern to be determined is stored) is being used). And since it is the second special design that is stored in the first winning order (reservation area 1 corresponds to the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u), the rest of the second special design that is currently displayed in a variable manner. When the variable time (5 seconds) elapses, the variable display starts, so the variable display start time is calculated to be 5 seconds later. In addition, since it is the first special design that is stored in the second prize winning order (in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u, the reservation area 2 corresponds to this), the rest of the first special design that is currently being changed is displayed. When the variable time (10 seconds) elapses, the variable display starts, so the variable display start time is calculated to be 10 seconds later. Next, since the third special symbol stored in the third winning order (reservation area 3 in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u corresponds to the reservation area 3) is the reservation of the second special design, the second special design currently being displayed in a variable manner is stored. When the variation time (40 s) of the reserved data stored first in the prize winning order elapses within the remaining variation time (5 s), the variation display starts, so the variation display start time is calculated to be 45 seconds later. Next, since it is the first special symbol that is stored in the fourth winning order (reservation area 4 corresponds to the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u), the first special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stored. When the variation time (10 s) of the reserved data stored second in the prize winning order elapses in the remaining variation time (10 s), the variation display is started, so the variation display start time is calculated to be 20 seconds later.

Thus, in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u, the variable display start time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is calculated in the order of establishment, and based on the variable display start time, the variable display start time is in descending order. has been assigned a variable display order.

At this timing, when the player operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is, as shown in the rearranged display mode shown in FIG. The pattern display is rearranged with the reserved pattern display of the second special pattern that is the third in winning order (the reserved pattern display that is fourth in winning order interrupts before the reserved pattern display that is third in winning order) and displayed.

FIG. 13 shows that, after 1 s from the state of FIG. 12, when the game ball enters the first starting port 63a, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 performs the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S907). 27, S914) is a diagram schematically showing the process of determining the order of starting the variable display of the reserved symbols newly stored in S914).

Since FIG. 13 shows the state after 1 s from FIG. 12, the remaining variation time is 9 s for the first special symbol being varied and the remaining variation time is 4 s for the second special symbol. Also, the fluctuation start time of each reserved area in the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u is updated.

The reservation of the newly established first starting port 63a (first special symbol) is the fifth winning order, and each data is stored in the reservation area 5 in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u. First, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol being changed and displayed, which is the same as the newly stored first special symbol, and the pending variation time of the first special symbols of the winning orders 2 and 4 are respectively added, and a new The holding of the established (stored) first special symbol is calculated (in this case, 24 s) when the variable display starts.

Next, as shown in the rearrangement schematic diagram of FIG. 13, the order after rearrangement (variation display start order) is reordered based on the variable display start time of each reserved area. At this time, when the player operates the frame button 22 to request rearrangement of the reserved symbol display, as shown in the display mode after rearrangement in FIG. is rearranged with the reserved symbol display of the third prize order (the reserved symbol displays of the fourth and fifth prize orders are interrupted before the reserved symbol display of the third prize order).

In this way, by calculating the variable display start time each time a hold occurs and determining the order of sorting, the player can operate the sorting request (operation of the frame button 22). In this case, the rearranged reserved symbol display can be quickly displayed.

Also, the variation pattern of the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot tends to be longer than the variation pattern selected when the variation time is off. As shown in FIG. 13, the first suspension in the winning order has a long variation time of 40 seconds. Therefore, the holding of the same second special symbol that is established later has a later fluctuation display start time than the holding of the first special symbol that is established later, and when rearranged, a long fluctuation time is selected. Behind the pending symbol display, a type (difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol) different from the pending symbol whose long fluctuation time is selected is collectively displayed. Therefore, the larger the number of pending symbol displays interrupting and displayed in the pending symbol display area following the pending symbol display, the more the player expects a big win from the previous pending symbol display. The sorting can be done with the expectation of a big win. Therefore, the interest in the game increases, and the game can be continued without getting bored.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 14 to 40. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing (FIG. 32) that is started when the power is turned on, main processing (FIG. 33, S1200) that is executed after the startup processing, and periodic processing (this embodiment). There are timer interrupt processing (Fig. 14) that is activated by a cycle of 2 milliseconds) and NMI interrupt processing (Fig. 31) that is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained, and then startup processing (FIG. 32) and main processing (FIG. 33, S1200) will be explained.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) and the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), based on various processes, generate a command to be sent to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, etc., provided in the RAM203 temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the pending ball number command set in the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108). Also, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then, in the case of the jackpot state, the specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened or closed. A large-opening opening/closing process for opening the door is executed (S103). That is, the specific winning hole 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning hole 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning hole 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S104). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S105). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 . Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. stored in the corresponding counter buffer area.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal hitting random number counter C4 are updated (S106). Specifically, the special per random number counter C1, the special per type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3, the stop type counter CS1 and the normal per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum value (this In the embodiment, they are cleared to 0 when they reach 399, 99, 100, 198, 239), respectively. Also, when the special winning random number counter C1 or the ordinary winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 or the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the special winning random number counter C1 or the ordinary winning random number counter. It is read as the initial value of C4, and the initial value is set in the special winning random number counter C1 or normal winning random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a process for displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the first symbol display device 37 and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed. (S107), and then, a starting winning process associated with winning to the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b is executed (S108). The details of the special symbol variation process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 15, and the details of the starting winning process (S108) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the start winning process (S108), the normal symbol variation process, which is the normal symbol variation process for the passing of the game ball through the normal symbol start opening 67, is performed (S109), and then the normal symbol start opening 67. Through-gate processing is executed for the passage of the game ball (S10). Details of the normal symbol variation process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29, and details of the through gate process (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. A launch control process for controlling the shooting of game balls is executed (S111), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the shooting control process (S111), the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. When the ball shooting is on, the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the special symbol variation process (S107), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S107). In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subjected to various judgments and determinations based on the acquired counter values, and the determined variation display is performed by predetermined control. In this mode, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are controlled to simultaneously perform variable display, or control is executed to stop display in a display mode showing the determination result. The special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) will be described below.

In the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S201). If it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (S202: Yes), a first special symbol variation stop process is executed (S204). The first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 17, S204) will be described later in detail, but when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during variation display has passed, the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game and a process of temporarily stopping the first special symbol during the variable display when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped by the symbol indicating the big win and the big win game of the second lottery game is executed. is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner (S202: No), a first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) will be described later in detail, but when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the processing for restarting the variable display is executed, while the temporary stop is performed. If not, if the pending data (various counter values) are stored in the first special symbol pending ball number storage area 203a, the big hit determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the pending data is executed. .

After the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S107) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, a second special symbol variation stop process (FIG. 23, S207) is executed. The second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 23, S207) will be described later in detail, but similar to the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204), the prescribed variation of the second special symbol during variable display When the time elapses, a process of stopping the variable display with the pattern showing the determination result of the second lottery game, the variable display of the first special pattern with the pattern showing the big win is stopped, and the big win game of the first lottery game is executed. If so, a process of temporarily stopping the second special symbol during variable display is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, a second special symbol variation start process is executed (S206). This second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206) will be described later in detail, but similar to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), when the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, While the process for restarting the variable display is executed, if it is not temporarily stopped, if the pending data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol pending ball number storage area 203b, that Big hit determination and variation pattern selection processing based on the pending data are executed. After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the first special symbol variation start process (S203), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S203).

In the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), first, it is determined whether the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301). Determination of whether or not the first special symbol is temporarily stopped is determined by whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped despite the variation time (variation pattern) being set. . When it is determined that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (S301: Yes), measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol is restarted (S302). Regarding the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), which will be described later, when the fluctuation pattern etc. when starting the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is selected. , the start of measurement of the fluctuation time is set. When the variation pattern is selected, a variation pattern command is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In addition, main controller 110 starts variable display of the first special symbol on first display device 37 accordingly. The variable display of the first special symbol (the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b) on the first symbol display device 37 is resumed (S303). A first special symbol variation restart command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to resume the variable display of the temporarily stopped first special symbol is set (S304). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S301: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is obtained (S305). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S306). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S308). . The data stored in the reservation area 1 to the reservation area 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball number storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S308). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on.

Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S309). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) will be described later in detail, but based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c, the set game Based on the state, a big win determination is executed as to whether or not the game is a big win. Further, when it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot, the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the first special symbol starts to be variably displayed and the start of the jackpot game is started after being stopped and displayed, and the second special symbol being variably displayed is temporarily stopped during the jackpot game of the first special symbol. can be made

Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S310). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), which will be described in detail later, is based on the result of the success/failure determination based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on each counter value.

Next, referring to FIG. 17, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S309).

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball execution area 203c is acquired (S401). It is determined whether or not the game state is a high probability game state (during probability variation) (S402). Determination of whether or not the gaming state is the high probability gaming state is executed by whether or not the variable probability flag 203m is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is ON (that is, the gaming state is a high probability gaming state (probability variation)) (S402: Yes), based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability, It is determined whether or not the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the big winning random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203m is off (that is, the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (not during probability variation)) (S402: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the special winning random number counter C1 matches the big winning random number value, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

It is determined whether or not the lottery result is a big hit (S405). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S405: Yes), the second fluctuation stop flag 203r is set to ON (S407). As a result, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the determination result is a jackpot, and when the variable display of the first special symbol that informs the determination result is stopped and displayed, if the second special symbol is fluctuating, if The variable display is stopped.

In this way, by setting the second fluctuation stop flag 203r to ON before starting the fluctuation display of the first special design, it is possible to temporarily stop the second special design when the first special design is stopped during the fluctuation display. As compared with the case of determining whether or not, it is possible to prevent the problem that the control processing is concentrated at the time of stopping the fluctuation.

Based on the value of the acquired special winning type counter C2, a big winning design is set in the first design display device 37, and the first big winning flag 203o is set to ON (S408). As a result, in the first symbol display device 37, a symbol based on the value of the special winning type counter C2 is set to the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b (for example, "7" for a 15R probability variable jackpot). .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result is OFF (S405: No), a lost symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S409). In this embodiment, in the case of misalignment, the left 7-segment LED of the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is set to "-" indicating misalignment. Here, each symbol set in the first symbol display device 37 is a process for setting symbols to be stopped and displayed when the variable display is stopped.

Next, referring to FIG. 18, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S310), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S310).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S310 ). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S501: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S502). When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S501: No), a special deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set. When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. Also, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

The jackpot type table is determined by the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S504). The jackpot type table is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table, and in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot, the 15R jackpot table is determined, and in the case of the 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R jackpot table is determined. . The variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c (S505).

A variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3 (S506). Here, a variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the audio ramp controller 113 is also set. A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S507). The start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set.

By starting the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol along with the setting of the variation pattern command, the variation time can be measured in conjunction with the timing of the variation start of the first special symbol, and the variation time can be accurately measured. can do.

Next, referring to FIG. 19, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation stop processing (S204).

In the first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204), first, it is determined whether or not the first variation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601). When it is determined that the first variation stop flag 203q is set to ON (S601: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602). When it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the end time (S602: Yes), the temporary first fluctuation stop command for instructing the temporary stop of the first special symbol to the voice lamp control device 113 is set. , the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is temporarily stopped, and the first fluctuation stop flag 203q is set to OFF (S603). Then, the measurement of the first variation time is interrupted (S604).

By configuring in this way, the first special symbol can also be temporarily stopped at the timing when the variation is stopped at the determination symbol that the second special symbol is a win. Therefore, the player can play the game while concentrating on the big win game in the second lottery game.

In addition, since the measurement of the first variation time is also interrupted in accordance with the timing of the temporary stop, it is possible to accurately measure the remaining variation time after the big winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, the third symbol display device 81 stops in a display mode in which the player can understand that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped. Is displayed. Specifically, characters such as "The first special symbol is temporarily stopped" are displayed, and the three main symbols, left, middle, and right, which constitute the special symbol, are continuously displayed in a swaying display mode. notifies that it is temporarily stopped. Further, the display mode for notifying the temporary stop is not limited to this, and other notification modes may be used.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time of the second special symbol is not the end time (that is, the variation display is in progress) (S602: No), the process of S605 is executed. When it is determined that the first variation stop flag 203q is off (S601: No), it is determined whether the variation time of the first special symbol during variation display is the end time (S605).

When it is determined that the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not the end time (S605: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation time of the first special symbol is the end time (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the first big hit flag 203o is set (S606). When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set (S606: Yes), the variable probability flag 203m is set to OFF (S607). Various settings of the jackpot game are made based on the determined fluctuation stop type (S608). Specifically, in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 15R normal jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to 15 times, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 30 seconds. be. In addition, in the case of the 2R probability variable jackpot, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is executed is set to 2 times, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a in one round is set to 2s.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S606: No), it is determined whether the time saving counter 203k is greater than "0" (S609). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is greater than "0" (S609: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203 is subtracted by 1 (S610). In other words, the time saving counter 203k is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol is variably displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving counter 203k is a value smaller than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S609: No), the process of S611 is executed.

A first confirmation command is set to the sound lamp control device 113 to instruct to confirm and stop the variable display of the first special symbol (S611). The first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the determined success/failure determination result (S612). The value in the first variable time storage area 203s is cleared to 0, and the first variable time measurement value is cleared to 0 (S613). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the second special symbol variation start process (S206), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation start process (S206).

In the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), the above-described first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203), the first special symbol for each process from S301 to S310 , 1st variation time measurement restart, 1st symbol display device 37, 1st special symbol variation resume command, 1st special symbol retention ball number counter value (N1), 1st special symbol retention ball storage area, 1st special symbol In each of the processes from S701 to S710 of the jackpot determination process and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process, the second special symbol, the second variation time measurement restart, the second symbol display device 37, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter The value (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area, the second special symbol jackpot determination process, and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process are the same except that they are changed, so description thereof is omitted. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), will be described. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S709).

In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709), the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is compared with the process of S401. However, in the process of S711, in the second special symbol holding ball execution area, for each process of S407 to S408, the second variation stop flag and the first jackpot flag are set to S717 to S718. Since they are the same except that they are changed to the stop flag and the second jackpot flag, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S710), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 20, S206), will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S710).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710), the above-described first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310), S507 to S508, the first The processing from S727 to S728 for the stop type command and the first variable time measurement start is the same except that it is changed to the first stop type command and the first variable time measurement start. omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107), will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation stop processing (S207).

In the second special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 23, S207), the above-described first special symbol variation stop processing (FIG. 19, S204), the first variation stop for each processing from S601 to S604 In each process from S801 to S804, the flag, the first special symbol, the temporary first fluctuation stop command, the first fluctuation time measurement interruption, the second fluctuation stop flag, the second special symbol, the temporary second fluctuation stop command, the second Changed to suspension of fluctuation time measurement, and for each process of S611 to S613, the first confirmation command, the first special symbol, and the first fluctuation time measurement value are S811 to S813. In each process, the second confirmation command , 2nd special symbol, and 2nd variation time measurement value are the same except that they are changed respectively, so the description thereof will be omitted.

Thus, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be independently executable in parallel, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously variably displayed. can be made Therefore, lottery games with more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined period of time, and the probability that a player will receive a big win within the predetermined period of time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, compared to the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, the pachinko machine 10 has a variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Even if it is relatively short, either the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be in a state where the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is easily executed, and by increasing the efficiency of the game, It is possible to suppress the problem that the state in which the special symbols are not variably displayed becomes long.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed by either one, if the sorting device 630 is provided as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is relatively If it is not shortened, there will be many overflows that will not be held balls. However, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the lottery game is performed with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if a variation with a long variation time is selected on the one hand, the variation of the special symbol on the other hand Since the lottery is performed, many lotteries of special symbols can be performed in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to show the player an effect with a sufficient variable time as necessary, and prevent the player from becoming bored with the game.

Further, even in the configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time and the lottery game is executed, when the jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other symbol is displayed. Since the variable display of the special symbols is temporarily stopped, the player can play the game while concentrating on the jackpot game.

In addition, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can understand that the temporary stop is in progress, so that the player can know that the lottery game that was in the middle of the variable display has not disappeared. It is possible to grasp it and play a big winning game without worry.

In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a sorting device 630, it is configured to facilitate winning alternately to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Winning is biased to one of the openings 63b, and by trying to make the other starting opening with few reservations win, game balls win more than the upper limit of the number of reservations in one of the starting openings 63a and 63b. It is possible to suppress the problem that many invalid balls are generated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S108). The starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) determines whether the game ball has won the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b. Up to 4 for each of the 2 starting ports 63b), each acquired counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. Further, when each counter value obtained based on the reserved ball is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol reserved ball storage areas 203b, a process of predicting the success/failure determination result, the selected variation pattern, etc. in advance is executed. The starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first starting opening 63a (starting winning) (S901). Here, winning to the first starting port 63a is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 63a (there has been a starting prize) (S901: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is obtained (S902). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903). It is determined whether this is less than 4, which is the upper limit of the number of reservations for the first starting port 63a (that is, whether the number of reservations is stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S904). A reserved pitch number command for notifying the reserved number to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S905). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the variation pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, are read out (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 The special hit random number counter storage area 203c1 of the execution area 203c, the special hit type counter storage area 203c2, the variation pattern determination counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 are reserved (stored) (S906).

Next, a first prefetch process is executed (S907). The first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S108) will be described in detail later, but the first special symbol storing start order of variable display based on each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored. The symbol and the second special symbol are combined to determine in advance what number it is, and furthermore, from the variation display order and each counter value stored, the success/fail judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. is executed.

Next, for each process from S908 to S914, the same process as the process performed for the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 63a executed in each process from S901 to S907 is performed in the second The only difference is the processing executed for the starting port 63b, so a detailed description will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 25, the first look-ahead process (S907), which is one process of the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108), will be described. FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing this first prefetching process (S907).

In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907), first, various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area 203a, special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, variation Each value of the pattern determination counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is read (S921). The read data is stored in the area with the smallest prize winning order among the vacant storage areas of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u, and the variable display based on the newly stored pending data (each counter value) is started. A variable display start time is calculated (S922).

As shown in FIG. 12, this fluctuation start time is the special symbol during the fluctuation display corresponding to the newly stored pending data (if the pending data is based on the first starting port 63a, the first special symbol, the second If the pending data based on the starting port 63b, each pending data previously stored based on the remaining variation time of the second special symbol) and the same starting ports 63a, 63b as the newly stored pending data is determined. It is calculated by adding each of the fluctuation times.

Here, each pending data previously stored based on the same starting point as the newly stored pending data means that if the newly stored pending data is pending data based on the first starting point 63a, Based on the first starting port 63a stored in (corresponding to the first special symbol) pending data, on the other hand, if the newly stored pending data is based on the second starting port 63b, stored first It is the pending data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second starting port 63b.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the rearranged order of all pending data stored in the sort pending storage area 203u is renumbered in descending order of the variable display start time (S923). Here, regarding the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, renumbering is performed for all pending data, but not limited to this, when the variable display start order is changed from the previous time, that is, If the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved data is interrupted by the previously stored variable display start order of the reserved data, it is of course possible to renumber only the changed order. good.

It is determined whether or not the game state when the newly stored holding data starts to fluctuate is the high probability game state (S924). Regarding the game state at the start of fluctuation, there is a state where the newly stored holding data stops by the time the fluctuation starts, but the look-ahead probability change flag 203u6 is on, and after that, there is a holding that stops with a 15R normal jackpot. It is determined by determining whether or not When it is determined that the game state when the newly stored holding data starts to fluctuate is the high probability game state (S924: Yes), the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. Based on this, the propriety of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the pertinent rearrangement pending storage area 203u (S925). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state when the newly stored holding data starts to fluctuate is the low probability game state (normal game state) (S924: No), special symbol jackpot for low probability Based on the jackpot determination value of the random number table 202a, the success or failure of the first special symbol is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the corresponding rearrangement pending storage area 203u (S927).

A first prefetch update process is executed (S926). The first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926) will be described in detail later, but the validity determination result of the pending data (various counter values) stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u in the order in which the variable display is actually started Based on, the jackpot type (probability variation or not) and variation pattern (variation time) are stored (updated).

Next, referring to FIG. 26, the first prefetch update process (S926), which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907), will be described. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this first prefetch update process (S926).

In the first look-ahead update process (FIG. 26, S926), first, it is determined whether or not the winning judgment result predicted in the process of S925 or S927 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) was a jackpot (S931). If it is determined that the result of the judgment of whether or not the prediction was a jackpot in the processing of S925 or S927 in the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S907) (S931: Yes), the predicted jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot or It is determined whether it was the second R probability variable jackpot) (S932). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S932: Yes), the prefetch probability variable flag 203u6 of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u corresponding to the newly stored pending data is set to ON (S933). . In addition, since the data in the reservation area before being shifted is cleared to 0 when the data is shifted to the upper reservation area and stored, the read-ahead probability variation flag 203u6 is set to OFF there. That is, once the look-ahead probability variation flag 203u6 is set to ON, the reserved area is shifted in order, and the next new data is shifted and overwritten (cleared to 0) in the changing data storage area to set it to OFF. be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not the variable probability jackpot (that is, the 15R normal jackpot) (S932: No), the process of S934 is executed.

From the special per variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state at the start of the variation display (whether it is in the probability variation or the time saving), the special per type counter C2 of the newly stored pending data, the variation pattern determination counter C3 , the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display is predicted based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S934).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the success/failure determination result predicted in the process of S925 in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) is out (S931: No), the game state at the start of the variable display is determined at the start of fluctuation display based on the values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data from the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 202e corresponding to whether or not A variation pattern is predicted (S935).

The predicted success/failure, stop type, and variation pattern are stored (corresponding to the newly stored pending data) in the area corresponding to the winning order of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u (S936). It is determined whether the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u was stored by interrupting (changing the order of) the previously stored variable display start order (S937). . If it is determined that the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is interrupted (changed) to the previously stored variable display start order. (S937: Yes), regarding the pending data after the order of starting the fluctuation display of the newly stored pending data (the pending data in the order of starting the fluctuation after the special symbol corresponding to the newly stored pending data stops fluctuating) , Again, the success or failure, stop type, and fluctuation pattern are predicted and updated (S938). Based on the success or failure, stop type, variation pattern, winning order, variation display start order, and look-ahead probability variation flag 203u6 corresponding to all the suspension data stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, each data is processed by the sound lamp control device. 113 is generated for each piece of pending data (S939).

In this way, when the game ball wins the first starting hole 63a or the second starting hole 63b and is held until the corresponding special symbol can be started to be displayed in a variable manner, the suitability judgment and selection are made before the start of the variable display. Determination of the variation pattern and the like are executed, and the variation start order during suspension is also calculated. Therefore, when the reserved symbol display is displayed, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in order of start of variation by the player's operation.

In addition, when a new hold is stored and the change start order is changed due to the hold (the newly stored hold change start order is interrupted and stored), the Among the stored holding areas, the validity judgment, the stop type, and the fluctuation pattern are updated for the hold that starts to change after the newly stored hold stops, so the new hold is stored. By doing so, even when the game state (whether it is a high-probability game state or a low-probability game state) at the start of fluctuation changes, it is possible to update to accurate data.

It should be noted that, in this embodiment, when the newly stored pending variation start order is interrupted and stored, the pending data (property determination, stop type, variation pattern) of the pending area are updated again. Not limited to this, each time a new hold is stored, all the hold areas may be re-determined. By configuring in this way, the data in the reservation area can be updated each time a new reservation is stored, and can always be configured with more accurate data.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the second look-ahead process (S914), which is one process of the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108), will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing this second prefetching process (S914).

The second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) pre-reads and stores the pending data based on the above-described first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) winning the first start opening 63a. While it is a process of determining the order of starting the variable display of the pending data and performing various judgments, the pending data based on the winning at the second start port 63b is read in advance, and the stored pending data The only difference is that the order of starting the variable display is determined, and various determinations are made.

Also, the second prefetch update process (S946), which is one process of the second prefetch process (FIG. 27, 914) shown in FIG. Based on the variable display start order of the reserved data based on the winning of the first starting port 63a, various selection data are predicted and the winning command is generated, whereas the second starting port 63b wins. Based on the variable display start order of the pending data based on the fact, the only difference is that the various selection data are predicted and the winning command is generated. do.

In this way, the game ball wins in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, and various counter values are newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (holding data is stored), the first prefetching process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914) is executed. The newly stored hold data is stored in the rearranged hold ball storage area 203u in the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) in the order in which the variable display starts first. Since it is determined by comparing with the variable display start time of each of the stored pending data, the game state (whether or not the probability is variable) is accurately determined when the variable display of the stored pending data is started. can do. Therefore, it is possible to accurately determine the result of determination of suitability, the type of stoppage, the variation pattern to be variably displayed, and the like. Therefore, next, even when the reserved data is newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second The variable display start time of the newly stored pending data can be accurately predicted based on the variable time (variation pattern) of each pending data predicted in the look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). As a result, the correct variable display start order can be predicted.

Further, when the variable display start order of the newly stored pending data is stored interrupting the variable display start order of the previously stored pending data (the order is earlier), the newly stored pending data For each pending data in the variable display start order after the data, the game state at the start of the variable display is again predicted by the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) or the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914). Then, prediction (read-ahead) of success/failure, stop type, and variation pattern is performed, so winning commands can be generated based on more accurate prediction results. Therefore, the audio ramp control device 113 can grasp the accurate prediction result of the stored pending data from the winning command.

Next, referring to FIG. 29, the normal symbol variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S109). The normal symbol variation process (S109) is a process for controlling the variable display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display unit 88, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 64, and the like.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting. (S1001). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the period from when the second symbol display section 88 displays the winning to when the opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 64 is being performed. When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S1001: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1001: No), it is determined whether or not the normal symbol of the second symbol display portion 88 is being variably displayed (S1002). When it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is being changed and displayed (S1002: Yes), it is determined whether the variation time of the normal symbol being executed in the second symbol display unit 88 has passed ( S1003). Incidentally, the variable time here is a time set in advance by the processing of S1017 and the processing of S1018, which will be described later, before the variable display is started in the second pattern display unit 88. FIG.

In the process of S1003, if the variation time has not elapsed (S1003: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1003, when it is determined that the variation time of the normal symbol that is displayed in a variable manner has passed (S1003: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display section 88 is set (S1004). . In the process of S1004, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S1018, the second symbol display unit 88 stops displaying (lights up) the "○" symbol as the second symbol. ). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of loss is set by the processing of S1017, the "x" symbol is displayed as the second symbol in the second symbol display unit 88, and the stop display (lights up) is displayed. displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S1004, the variable display in the second symbol display section 88 is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the process of S1017 and the process of S1018. The 2-symbol display portion 88 is stopped (lighted up).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a win (S1005). When it is determined that the current normal symbol lottery result is a hit (S1005: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the normal electric accessory 64 is set (1006). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol is a loss (S1005: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1002, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not displayed in a variable display (S1002: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times of suspension of variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S1007). After the process of S1007, the process of S1023 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is greater than 0 (S1008). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S1008: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S1009).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203h is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the normal design reservation 1 to the normal design reservation 4 of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203h are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, normal design reservation 1 → execution area, normal design reservation 2 → normal design reservation 1, normal design reservation 3 → normal design reservation 2, normal design reservation 4 → normal design reservation 4, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area 203i is acquired (S1011).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, whether it is not 0) (S1012). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is 0 (that is, it is not during the time saving) (S1012: No), the hit determination value of the normal symbol random number table for low probability (FIG. 8(d)) Based on, the result of the suitability determination is acquired (S1013). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203k is not 0 (that is, during the time saving) (S1012: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a jackpot ( S1014). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1014: Yes), the process of S1013 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the jackpot (S1014: No), the normal per symbol random number table for high probability (FIG. 8(d)) hit determination value Based on this, the propriety determination result is acquired (S1015).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is winning (S1016). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is not a hit (that is, it is a loss) (S1016: No), the display mode of "x", which is the display mode at the time of loss, is set. (S1017). On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (that is, a win) (S1016: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode at the time of winning, is changed. It is set (S1018).

It is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the game state is during time saving (including variable probability)) (S1019). If it is determined that the time is not being shortened (S1019: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 is set to 0.2 s, and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1020).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during time saving (S1019: Yes), it is determined whether it is during the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (S1021). When it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in progress (S1021: Yes), the process of S1020 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in progress (S1021: No), the opening time of the blades 64a and 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 is 1 s, and the number of times of opening is 2 times. It is set (S1020).

It is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203k is 1 or more (that is, the game state is during time saving (including variable probability)) (S1023). When it is determined that the time is reduced (S1023: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 3s (S1024). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not being shortened (S1023: No), the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 30 s (S1025).

Next, the through gate passage processing (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S110). This through gate passage processing (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67, and when there is passage of the game ball. , is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (FIG. 30, S110), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (gate) 67 (S1031). Here, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1031: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is acquired (S1032). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S1033).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (gate) 67 (S1031: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g is If it is not less than 4 (S1033: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port 67 (S1031: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S1033: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203g (S1034). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the timer interrupt process described above and the first normal design flag are stored in the free reservation area (normal design reservation 1 to normal design) of the normal design reservation ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the reservation 4) (S1035). In the process of S1035, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203g is referred to, and if the value is 0, the normal symbol reserved 1 area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the normal design reservation 2 area, if the value is 2, the normal design reservation 3 area, and if the value is 3, the normal design reservation 4 area is first. area.

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S1041), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing this start-up process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 32), first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104), and if it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (11605). (S1105: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S1110.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S1110, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1110). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main controller 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1111, S1112).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall opens, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed during startup processing, the RAM 203 initialization processing (S1111, S1112) is executed.

Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing (S1111, S1112) of the RAM 203 is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S1111, S1112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1112). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) is not turned on (S1104: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is If it is normal (S1107: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1113). After that, the interrupt is permitted (S914). Then, the process proceeds to main processing (S1200), which will be described later.

Next, the main process (S1200) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing this main process (S1200). This main process (S1200) is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process (FIG. 33, S1200), first, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is sent to each sub side. External output processing for transmission to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1201).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (100 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1203). A display control process for the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1204).

Next, display control processing of a second pattern (for example, a pattern of "o" or "x") by the second pattern display unit 88 is executed (S1205). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display unit 88 is displayed. Then, the variable display of the second symbol is carried out. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the normal win random number counter C4, and when the second symbol wins, the normal electric accessory 64 is opened for a predetermined period of time.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S1207). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1207: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the above-described processes after S1201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous main process (S1207: No), the initial The value random number counter CINI1, normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1208, S1209).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1208). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1202 (S1209).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1205 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 , the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1206, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1206: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 31 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1210 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1210), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1211). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1212), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1213), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1206 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1205, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1208 and S1209 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1201. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S1301). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1201. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 40. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process (S1400) executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 34, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1301). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing of S1418 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1302). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see FIG. 35, S1415), it executes power-off processing in S1418. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S1418 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1302: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1418. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1306. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1303: Yes), it will transfer to S1304 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1308.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1303: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1418 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1303: No), and the process proceeds to S1308.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1302: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S1418, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1304 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1304, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1304). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1305: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1306). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1305: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1307), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S1308, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1308). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1418 is executed (see FIG. 35 and S1417). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1418 is executed, the reason why the process of S1308 is reached with the power-off flag turned on is that the current start-up processing is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1418 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1308: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1109), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1310), an interrupt Permission is set (S1113), and the process proceeds to the main process (S1400). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1308 is reached while the power-off flag is turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1308: No), S1309, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1310 to set the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1310).

The reason why the clearing process of S1309 is skipped is that when the process of S1308 is reached from S1304 via the process of S1306, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1304, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main processing (S1400) executed by MPU 221 in audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing this main process (S1400). When the main process (S1400) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process (S1400) was started or the process of S1401 was last executed ( S1401), if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1411 without performing the processes of S1402 to S1410. In the processing of S1401, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S1402 to S1410 are processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , S1411 and the command determination process of S1412 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1414 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, the setting regarding the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1401 (S1401: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1403 to S1414 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1402). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1409 described later (S1403), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1404). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1405 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1405, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1406). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is a command in the display control device. 114. In the pending number display update process (S1406), which will be described in detail later, a process of updating the display of the pending symbol display of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the data in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k. .

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1407). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a rearrangement possible period (a period excluding the state during the jackpot game and the state without suspension), which will be described later, the suspension symbol display that was displayed in the order of establishment of the suspension starts to be displayed in a variable manner. They are sorted in order and displayed.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is finished, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1408), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1409). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1409, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1410). After that, the process proceeds to S1411. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1408 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1409 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In the process of S1411, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variable pattern command for display is generated based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110, and the command is sent to the display controller 114. Executes a variable display setting process, which is a process for setting to transmit to. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the fluctuation display setting process (S1411), the temporary fluctuation stop process is executed (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412) is a temporary first fluctuation stop command indicating that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped from the main control device 110 or a temporary second fluctuation stop command that indicates that the second special symbol is temporarily stopped. is received, a process for temporarily stopping the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed. The details of this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the temporary fluctuation stop process (S1412), the pending rearrangement process is executed (S1413). In this reserved rearrangement process, the reserved symbol display is rearranged and displayed in the order of start of variable display from the winning order based on the winning command output from the main controller 110, based on the player's button operation. Execute the process. The details of this pending rearrangement process (S1413) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the pending rearrangement process (S1413), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1414). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1414 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1415). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1415 (S1415: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1417), and the power-off processing is executed (S1418). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1419), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1415 (S1415: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1416), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1416: No), the process returns to S1401, and the main process (S1400) is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1416: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process (S1400) is not executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1414). This command determination process (S1414) is executed in the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 judge. Details of the command determination process (S1414) will be described below.

In the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), first, out of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether or not the first variation pattern command has been received (S1501). Here, the first variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the first special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the first variation pattern command has been received (S1501: Yes), the first variation start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1502). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received first variation pattern command (S1503). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. It is used when setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the first special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first variation pattern command has not been received (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the second variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1505). Here, the second variation pattern command is a special symbol indicating a variation display mode for variably displaying the second special symbol. Then, when it is determined that the second variation pattern command has been received (S1504: Yes), the second variation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1505). The variation pattern type is extracted from the received second variation pattern command (S1506). The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol. It is used when setting a second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the control device 114 of the start of the second special symbol variation display effect and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol.

If it is determined that the second variation pattern command has not been received (S1504: No), it is determined whether the first or second stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S1507). If it is determined that the first or second stop type command has been received (S1507: Yes), the first stop type selection flag is set to ON if the first stop type command has been received. When the second stop type command is received, the second stop type selection flag is set to ON. (S1508). A stop type (either 15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, or 2R probability variable jackpot) is extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command (S1506). The extracted stop type is stored in the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The stop type extracted from the first stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the second stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. are stored so as to be identifiable.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first or second stop type command has not been received (S1507: No), it is determined whether a pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (S1510). When it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S1510: Yes), the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol pending ball number of the main controller 110 included in the received pending ball number command The value of the number counter f (that is, the number of pending balls in the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved in the main control device 110) is extracted, and the number of pending balls of the first special symbol is a voice lamp. It is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 of the control device 113, and the second special symbol reserved ball number is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 (S1511).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first start hole 63a or the second start hole 63b (start win). , by the processing of S1508, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. 2 can be matched to the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203f. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Or even if it deviates from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203f, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. However, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110 can be matched.

If it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1510: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command has been received (S1512). When it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), the information of each reserved area in the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u of the main controller 110 is extracted from the received command (S1510). Here, the information of each reservation area in the sorting reservation storage area 203u to be extracted is, for each reservation, the winning judgment result, the jackpot type, the variation pattern type, the order of the variation display, and the time until the start of the variation display. .

On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), it is determined whether the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command has been received (S1515). If it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received (S1515: Yes), if the temporary first fluctuation stop command is received, the secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set. When it is set to ON and the temporary second fluctuation stop command is received, the secondary second fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1516).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the temporary first fluctuation stop command or the temporary second fluctuation stop command is not received (S1515: No), the first special symbol fluctuation restart command or the second special symbol fluctuation restart command is received. It is determined whether or not (S1517). When it is determined that the first special symbol variation resume command or the second special symbol variation resume command is received (S1517: Yes), the first special symbol variation resume command corresponding to the received command is received. In this case, the secondary first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON. Also, when the second special symbol variation restart command is received, the secondary second variation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1518).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol variation restart command or the second special symbol variation resume command has not been received (S1517: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

Next, the pending number display update process (S1406) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process (S1406). This pending number display update process (S1406) is a process for updating the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the data of each pending area of the sub-sorting pending storage area 223k. .

In the pending number display update process (FIG. 37, S1406), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each pending area of the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k is updated (S1431). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the updating of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may of course be performed by other methods.

The reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which the sorting flag 223k7 of the subordinate sorting reserved storage area 223k is turned on is the reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is turned off in the variable display start order. As for the symbol display, the suspended symbol display is displayed in the order in which the suspension is established (S1432).

Here, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set by the operation of the frame button 22 during the rearrangement possible period (in this embodiment, the is pressed), all pending areas in which pending data is stored are set to ON. As a result, all of the displayed pending symbol displays are rearranged and displayed based on the pending variable display start order from the pending establishment order. On the other hand, after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, regarding the newly stored reservation, since the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF, the order established without being rearranged, that is, the third symbol display device 81 It is displayed at the end of the reserved design display displayed in .

Therefore, when the player intends to rearrange the reserved symbol display and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order. Also, the rearranged pending symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the pending symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (occurring) pending is displayed first in the establishment order. Since it is displayed at the end without being interrupted by the reserved pattern display that is being displayed, the player can suppress the inconvenience that the current display is confused in which order it is displayed. can be done.

By rearranging only the reserved pattern displays displayed when the frame button 22 is operated in this way, the variable display start order can be notified only when the player wants to know.

Also, usually, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the hold for the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the change display start time is earlier in the hold that occurs later in the order of establishment occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the hold for the big win. In such a case, when the reserved patterns are rearranged, the reserved patterns whose formation order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved patterns whose formation order is earlier (on the side of the reserved pattern display area Ds1). be. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the display of the reserved symbols, if the reserved symbols whose establishment order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose establishment order is early, Among the reserved patterns displayed before the interrupted reserved pattern, the reserved pattern caused by the prize winning to the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the interrupted reserved pattern is considered to be a big hit. can have hope.

Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, the player can operate the frame button in anticipation of a change in the arrangement order, thinking that there may be a big hit pending in the pending symbol display. , the frame button 22 can be operated with anticipation for the big win.

Next, the variable display setting process (S1411) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1411). This variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) is based on the first or second variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third pattern display device 81. Then, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot), the process of setting the first or second stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type to run.

In the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411), first, it is determined whether or not the first variable start flag 223c1 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1601). Then, when it is determined that the first variation start flag 223c1 is off (S1601: No), since the first variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the processing of S1606 is executed. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first fluctuation start flag 223c1 is ON (S1601: Yes), the first fluctuation start flag 223c is set to OFF (S1602).

In the processing of S1603, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the first variation pattern command in the processing of S1503 of the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223. Then, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S1603). The display variation pattern command for the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol variation pattern command. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the variable pattern command for display of the 2-byte configuration are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special design, and if it is "01", the second special design It is configured to indicate that it corresponds to

The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in the process of S1603 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and by the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) It is transmitted to the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command is displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81. The first special symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed).

Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol Display setting is performed), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b1 is decreased by 1, and the reserved data stored in the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is stored in the previous reserved area. It is shifted (S1604). More specifically, reservation area 1 → the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the variable display data, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3, reservation The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 5→reservation area 4, reservation area 6→reservation area 5, reservation area 7→reservation area 6, reservation area 8→reservation area 7, and so on. Using the secondary first variable time storage area 223i, measurement of the variable time of the first special symbol is started (S1605).

It is determined whether the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1606). Then, when it is determined that the second variation start flag 223c2 is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1606: No), the first variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S1611 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is ON (S1606: Yes), the second fluctuation start flag 223c2 is set to OFF (S1607).

In the processing of S1506 of the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414), the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the second variation pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223m of the RAM 223, and the second A special symbol display variation pattern command is generated (S1608).

The second special symbol display variation pattern command set in the process of S1608 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S1402) of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) It is transmitted to the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, a special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the pattern is performed.

Here, when the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command for the second special symbol, the right side display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the variation display mode indicated by the received display variation pattern command, The second special symbol (third symbol) is variably displayed (dynamically displayed). Along with the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol display setting is performed), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b2 is decreased by 1, and the reserved data stored in the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is stored in the previous reserved area. It is shifted (S1609). More specifically, reservation area 1 → the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the variable display data, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3, reservation The data in each area is shifted in the order of area 5→reservation area 4, reservation area 6→reservation area 5, reservation area 7→reservation area 6, reservation area 8→reservation area 7, and so on.

Using the secondary second variable time storage area 223j, measurement of the variable time of the second special symbol is started (S1610).

It is determined whether the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON (S1611). If it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 are not set to ON (that is, they are OFF) (S1611: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the first stop type selection flag 223d1 or the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is on (S1611: Yes), if the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is on, When the first stop type selection flag 223d1 is set to OFF and the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to ON, the second stop type selection flag 223d2 is set to OFF (S1612).

In the process of S1509 of the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414), the stop type extracted from the received first stop type command or second stop type command is set (S1613). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the display control device 114 displays the stop type (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, or 2R probability variable jackpot) is there?) is generated. In addition, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, the stop type (15R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot) is displayed on the display control device 114 based on the stop type. or not) is generated (S1614). In addition, the first or second stop type command notified from the main controller 110 notifies the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, and is notified even if the judgment result is out. . If the determination result is out, the out symbol is set without referring to the stop type.

By being configured in this manner, the audio lamp control device 113 can control the display control device 114 so as to variably display both the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time.

In addition, based on the fact that the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, by also shifting the data of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k, a dedicated command for shifting from the main controller 110 It is possible to reduce the control load of the main controller 110 without controlling the transmission of the .

Next, the temporary fluctuation stopping process (S1412) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this temporary fluctuation stop processing (S1412). This temporary fluctuation stop process (FIG. 39, S1412) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, in the temporary fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412), one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in fluctuation on the third symbol display device 81 becomes a big hit, and the other fluctuation display is stopped. A process for temporarily stopping the game is executed during the jackpot game.

In the temporary fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 39, S1412), first, it is determined whether or not the secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON. When it is determined that the secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to ON (S1701: Yes), the secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is set to OFF (S1702).

A first temporary stop command for display is generated (S1703). The first temporary stop command for display is a command for controlling the display control device 114 to temporarily stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed by the third symbol display device 81 . When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the display control device 114 stops the variable display of the first special symbol, and then causes the first special symbol (left, middle and right main symbols) to be displayed while being slightly shaken. Then, the player is notified that the variable display is temporarily stopped. In addition, by displaying the characters "the first special symbol is temporarily stopped" in the left display area Dm1 of the third symbol display device 81, it is easier for the player to understand that the variable display is temporarily stopped. It is configured to notify.

In this way, the player can recognize that the special symbol that was being variably displayed has been temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of the big win, and the lottery that was being variably displayed will disappear or become invalid. It is possible to play a game with peace of mind by preventing anxiety from being lost.

Further, the display mode of the temporary stop is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and may be a configuration in which the first special symbol is erased from the left display area Dm and only characters are used to notify that the temporary stop is in progress. However, other configurations are also possible.

When the first temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol measured in the slave first variation time storage area 223i is interrupted (suspended).

By configuring in this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol can be managed accurately, and even when the fluctuation display is restarted, the fluctuation display can be performed accurately with the remaining fluctuation time.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the secondary first fluctuation stop flag 223e is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1701: No), is the secondary fluctuation stop flag 223f set to ON? It is determined (S1705). When it is determined that the second fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to ON (S1705: Yes), the second fluctuation stop flag 223f is set to OFF (S1706), and the second temporary stop command for display is issued. is generated (S1707). The second temporary stop command for display, like the first temporary stop command for display, controls the display control device 114 so as to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed by the third symbol display device 81. This command is for As with the first special symbol, the second special symbol is also temporarily stopped in a temporary stop display mode.

When the second temporary stop command for display is set, the measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol measured in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is interrupted (suspended).

By configuring in this way, the variation time of the second special symbol can be managed accurately, and even when the variation display is resumed, the variation display can be performed accurately with the remaining variation time.

It is determined whether or not the secondary first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709). When it is determined that the secondary first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to ON (S1709: Yes), the secondary first fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1710).

It is determined whether or not the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the secondary first variation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the first special symbol stored in the secondary first variation time storage area 223i is 3 seconds or less (S1711: Yes), the first short variation mode for display A resume command is set (S1712). When the command for resuming the first short fluctuation mode for display is set, it is output to the display control device 114 . This command for resuming the first short fluctuation mode for display causes the display control device 114 to display the character "The lottery result of the temporarily stopped fluctuation display!" After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "The lottery result of the temporarily stopped variation display has been displayed!", and continues to be displayed until the next variation starts. .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the first special symbol stored in the secondary first variation time storage area 223i is longer than 3 seconds (S1711: No), the first normal variation mode for display is resumed. A command is set (S1713). When the command for resuming the first normal variation mode for display is set, it is output to the display control device 114 . This command for resuming the first normal variation mode for display is to display the text "Varying the temporarily stopped variable display!" After variably displaying the main symbols (three symbols on the left, middle and right) during the remaining variation time, based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the first special symbol is displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. stop display. Next, the variable time measurement is restarted in the secondary first variable time storage area 223i (S1714).

By configuring in this way, even if the main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, voice lamp control Since the device 113 determines the remaining variation time and selects the remaining variation mode, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, when the remaining variation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted variation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player overlooks it or cannot understand the notification result because it is too short. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the player is notified that the lottery result will be displayed immediately, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result has been displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, characters are displayed to notify that the interrupted variable display has been stopped, so if the remaining variable time is very short (for example, within 1 second). Also, the player can recognize that the interrupted variable display is valid and the determination result is displayed still.

Further, even when the remaining variation time is longer than the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the player is notified that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is being displayed in a variable manner. A person can easily recognize that the interrupted variable display was effective without disappearing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the slave first fluctuation restart flag 223g is off (S1709: No), it is determined whether the slave second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1715). When it is determined that the secondary second fluctuation restart flag 223h is set to ON (S1715: Yes), the secondary second fluctuation restart flag 223g is set to OFF (S1716).

It is determined whether or not the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717). When it is determined that the measured remaining variation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is 3 seconds or less (S1717: Yes), the second short variation mode for display A resume command is set (S1718). When the second short fluctuation mode resume command for display is set, it is output to the display control device 114 . This command for resuming the second short fluctuation mode for display causes the display control device 114 to display the text "Display the lottery result of the temporarily stopped fluctuation display!" in the right display area Dm2 during the remaining fluctuation time. After that, based on the confirmation command output from the main controller 110, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the character display changes to the character "The lottery result of the temporarily stopped variation display has been displayed!", and continues to be displayed until the next variation starts. .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the measured variation time of the second special symbol stored in the secondary second variation time storage area 223j is longer than 3 s (S1717: No), the second normal variation mode for display is resumed. A command is set (S1719). When the command for resuming the second normal variation mode for display is set, it is output to the display control device 114 . This command for resuming the second normal variation mode for display is to display the characters "Varying the temporarily stopped variation display!" After variably displaying the main symbols (three symbols on the left, middle and right) during the remaining variation time, based on the confirmation command output from the main control device 110, the second special symbol is displayed with the symbol indicating the lottery result. stop display. Next, the variable time measurement is resumed in the secondary second variable time storage area 223j (S1720). On the other hand, if it is determined that the secondary second fluctuation resume flag 223h is off (S1715: No), this process is terminated.

By configuring in this way, even if the main controller 110 does not perform processing for instructing the remaining variation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the remaining variation time, voice lamp control Since the device 113 determines the remaining variation time and selects the remaining variation mode, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, when the remaining variation time is short, even if the continuation of the interrupted variation mode is displayed, there is a problem that the player overlooks it or cannot understand the notification result because it is too short. However, in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10, when the remaining time is within the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the player is notified that the lottery result will be displayed immediately, and then the notification result is displayed. Therefore, the player can recognize that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result has been displayed.

Furthermore, even after the special symbols are stopped and displayed, characters are displayed to notify that the interrupted variable display has been stopped, so if the remaining variable time is very short (for example, within 1 second). Also, the player can recognize that the interrupted variable display is valid and the determination result is displayed still.

Further, even when the remaining variation time is longer than the reference time (3 seconds in this embodiment), the player is notified that the interrupted (temporarily stopped) notification result is being displayed in a variable manner. A person can easily recognize that the interrupted variable display was effective without disappearing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the interrupted variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is to be resumed, the player is notified to that effect by text. Alternatively, a lamp or the like may be used to notify the operator. In addition, it is possible to display suspended fluctuations, such as a display mode that lets the player know that the fluctuation display has been resumed (for example, an animation that informs that the character, etc., has resumed the suspended fluctuation display). Of course, the notification may be made in a display mode dedicated to restarting the display. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the interrupted variable display has been resumed.

In this embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to select a variation pattern in accordance with the remaining variation time. Not limited to this, when the main controller 110 resumes the temporarily stopped variation table time, the remaining variation time can be used to change the variation pattern of the same variation time or the variation time slightly shorter than the remaining variation time. It may be configured to select a variation pattern. When a variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time is selected, the sound ramp control device 113 delays the difference between the remaining variation time and the variation pattern with a slightly shorter variation time to display the variation. , It is possible to perform a variation table time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the remaining variation time.

Next, the pending rearrangement process (S1413) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this pending rearrangement process (S1413). This pending sorting process (FIG. 40, S1413) is one process of the main process (S1400) (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. As described above, the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) includes the pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the order of establishment of pending when the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid period The display is set to be rearranged in the variable display start order.

In the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413), first, it is determined whether or not it is a rearrangeable period (S1801). During the rearrangement possible period, the game state other than the state of no reservation established in the jackpot game or different start ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is no one or more reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is arranged. It is set in the exchangeable period.

If it is determined that it is the sortable period (S1801: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1802). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third pattern display device 81 displays characters such as "Perhaps rearrangement is possible!" The period is reported. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may naturally be configured to control so as to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing a rearrangement possible period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and can operate the frame switch 22 at an appropriate timing. can. In addition, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and when the frame button 22 is operated, if the rearrangement is possible, the rearrangement display may be performed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1803). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1803: Yes), the sorting flags 223k7 of all the reserved areas in which the pending data of the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k are stored are set to ON. (S1804).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the sortable period (S1801: No) and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1803: No), the process ends.

With this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, only the pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be rearranged.

The player can know the actual order of starting the variable display, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (special symbol to start the variable display). Therefore, the game can be played while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, the sorting device 630 alternately alternates between the first start port 63a and the second start port 64a so that the game balls can easily win the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The game can be played evenly, and the game can be played efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the rearrangement of the reserved symbols is executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, but is not limited to this, and is executed each time a new reserved pattern is stored. Of course, it may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variable display start order from the reserved symbols rearranged in the variable start order.

In this embodiment, the rearrangement possible period is other than the state in which there is no reservation during the jackpot game or in different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is no more than one reservation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, it is not limited to this, and the sortable period may be set during the jackpot game. It may be set to something other than this, and may be determined as appropriate.

In addition, when the jackpot game is set as the rearrangement possible period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped fluctuation display during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the reserved first special symbol or second special symbol and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Then, the sorting order is determined, and sorting is performed based on the sorting order. By configuring in this way, even if a new reserved display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the reserved display mode and the display mode already displayed before the reserved display mode is displayed are combined. , rearrangement can be performed in an accurate variation start order, and the accurate variation start order can be notified to the player even in the jackpot game machine.

Further, in this embodiment, the rearranged data are stored in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u of the main controller 110 and the subordinate rearrangement reserve storage area 223k of the sound lamp controller 113. FIG. Not limited to that, the main control device 110 is configured to notify various data necessary for sorting by the winning command of the audio lamp control device 113 (results of success or failure, jackpot types, variation pattern types, etc.), The rearrangement may be performed only by the audio lamp control device 113 .

With this configuration, main controller 110 backs up various data necessary for rearrangement in RAM 203 even in the event of a power failure. By outputting the data to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 rearranges the data based on the various data, thereby making it possible to easily recover from power failure.

In this embodiment, depending on the remaining variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the start of variation and the variation pattern type of the data stored in the rearrangement suspension storage area 203u, the reserved first special symbol or the second special symbol The fluctuation start time was calculated for the 2 special symbols, and the fluctuation start order was calculated. Not limited to that, when the game ball wins, information (time information) as to whether or not it is a variation mode longer than a certain time is determined by determining whether it is a variation mode that becomes a reach, and the time information and the variation are determined. The order of starting the fluctuation may be roughly determined from the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and rearranged. By configuring in this way, at the time of winning a prize, it is determined whether it is a variation mode that will be a reach (whether it is a long-term variation mode or a short-time variation mode), and an accurate variation time (variation mode) is determined Even in the pachinko machine 10 that is determined based on information such as the number of held balls at the start of variation, it is possible to notify the player of the rough variation start order.

Therefore, although the player may not be in the correct order of the start of the variation, the fact that the rearrangement has been performed is included in the long-term variation (variation that becomes reach) that is reserved. , the game can be played with the expectation of a big win.

In this embodiment, the sortable period is determined by the game state, but it is not limited to that, and it is determined whether the sorting is possible (for example, the state in which the reserved symbol display is displayed), It may be configured to notify that rearrangement is possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to flexibly set the period during which rearrangement is possible, and to give the player more opportunities to rearrange.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 18, S310) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22, S710) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 Then, the case of selecting the special winning variation pattern table or the special losing variation pattern table according to the game state based on the judgment result of the big hit and selecting various variation patterns has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 determines that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number or more (this embodiment In the example, 3 or more), and the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (this implementation In the form, it is determined whether there are more than 2), and if there are more, a short-time variation pattern configured with a shorter variation time (0.5 seconds in this embodiment) than the other variation patterns is selected. be. Regarding the selection of the variation pattern of the second special symbol, as with the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the difference between the number of retained balls of the second special symbol and the number of retained balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol determines whether or not the number of held balls of the second special symbol is greater than a predetermined number, and a short-time off variation pattern is selected.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, when the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol respectively, the state of each other's reserved balls is determined, and a special It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a variation pattern (in this embodiment, a variation pattern that is out of a short period of time) is selected.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 41 is a diagram schematically showing an adjustment special failure variation pattern table 202e in the special failure variation pattern table 202e of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The special out-of-adjustment variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is a variation pattern table commonly selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

This adjustment special outlier variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is used in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown), which will be described later. It is a variation pattern table to be selected. Specifically, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol for selecting the variation pattern is 3 or more, and the difference between the number of reserved balls of the other special symbol (second special symbol if it is the first special symbol) is two. When there are more than this, this adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table is selected. The adjustment special failure variation pattern table 202e (Fig. 41) is a variation pattern table that is selected only when the result of the judgment is failure, and consists of only one type with a variation time of 0.5 seconds. there is Therefore, regardless of the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern determination counter CS3, a variation pattern outside the short time period (variation time of 0.5 seconds) is selected.

In this way, by selecting a short-time deviation variation pattern, the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, and the difference from the reserved balls of the other special symbol is 2 or more, and the number of reserved balls is equal to each other. Even if it is not, it is possible to speed up the digestion of the more reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern and the second special pattern can be evenly reserved, and only the other is The upper limit number (4 in this embodiment) is reached, and overflow can be prevented.

In addition, by judging whether or not there are three or more reserved balls with a special pattern for selecting a variation pattern, when there are few reserved balls, a short-time off variation pattern is frequently selected, resulting in a game production ( It is possible to prevent spoiling interest due to fluctuation of special symbols.

In addition, in the present embodiment, only one type of short-time deviation variation pattern (variation time of 0.5 seconds) is set in the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41). It may be configured with a variation pattern that is out of a short time configured with a variation time of . By configuring in this way, when the other special symbol is fluctuating, by changing the type (fluctuation time) of the short-time off fluctuation pattern to be selected according to the remaining fluctuation time, the ball is held more. The numbers can be even with each other. Also, the fluctuation time of the reserved ball of the other special symbol may be predicted to change the fluctuation pattern of short-time deviation to be selected. By doing so, even if a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (for example, a variation pattern of Super Reach C, etc.) is selected among the special symbol retention balls with fewer retention balls. , By selecting a short-time off variation pattern that matches it, it is possible to adjust the holding balls of each other's special symbols more evenly.

In this embodiment, the difference between the held balls is determined to determine the variation pattern for adjustment. The pattern may be discriminated and a variation pattern that reduces the difference in variation time may be selected. Specifically, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the variation pattern selected with the second special symbol is discriminated, and if a variation pattern with a long variation time is selected, a variation with a relatively long variation time. A pattern (variation time or the like in accordance with the end of variation of the variation pattern of the second special symbol) may be determined so that the digestion speeds of the held balls are the same.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust the numbers of held balls to be equal to each other without determining extremely short or long variation patterns.

Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution winning device 630 assists the game balls to easily enter the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 64b alternately. Therefore, due to the difference in the selected variation pattern (variation time) between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the digestion speed of the retained ball is different. The numbers may be uneven, or the game balls may not be alternately sorted to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the sorting device 630, resulting in an imbalance. However, when bias occurs, in the three states before the number of held balls reaches the upper limit (4 in this embodiment), if the difference in the number of held balls is two or more, a short time Since the deviation variation pattern is selected, the player can continue the game without worrying about the overflow occurring with the reserved balls of one of the special symbols.

42, in the second embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing for the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 43, in the second embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 42, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 2 (S320) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S320). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, when the result of the determination is out, it is a process for selecting a short-time out variation pattern according to the number of held balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), first, it is determined whether or not the result determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot ( S511). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S511: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S512). When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(c)) is determined by the jackpot type based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 (S513). The jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(c)) is composed of a 15R jackpot table and a 2R jackpot table. , the 2R jackpot table is determined.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is off (S511: No), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 or more (S514). The number of the first special symbol reserved balls is determined based on the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e. When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 or more (S514: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is subtracted from the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is determined whether the value is two or more (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more) (S515). Here, it is judged by the value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more (S515: Yes), the adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is less than 3 (S514: No), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is subtracted from the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. When it is determined that the result is less than 2 (S515: No), the special outlier variation pattern table 202e corresponding to the game state is set. When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. Also, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

The variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c (S518). A variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, and a first variation pattern command is generated (S519). Here, the first variation pattern command is a command for notifying the selected first special symbol variation pattern to the sound lamp control device 113 . A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S520). After that, the start of measurement of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S521).

Thus, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three or more, and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or more more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, By setting the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) and selecting the deviation pattern for a short time, the variation of the first special symbol ends in 0.5 seconds, and the next first special The reserved ball is digested by starting the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the reserved ball of the symbol. Therefore, one reserved ball of the first special symbol is digested after 0.5 seconds, and the speed of digestion of the reserved ball of the first special symbol is increased, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are combined. Adjustments can be made to reduce the difference in ball retention.

In addition, when a large number of game balls enter the first start port 63a in a short time, and the difference between the reserved balls becomes large, or when the first special symbol has a relatively long variation pattern (for example, a super reach C variation pattern, etc. ) is selected, while in the second special symbol, a relatively short variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern of normal deviation A, etc.) is continuously selected, and if the difference between the held balls becomes large (for example, the second 4 reserved balls of 1 special pattern and 1 reserved ball of the 2nd special pattern, etc.), each time the fluctuation of the 1st special pattern starts, the state of the reserved ball is judged, and the fluctuation pattern that is off for a short time. Since the process of whether or not to select is performed, in the first special symbol, a variation pattern that is continuously out of short time will be selected, and adjustment will be made quickly to reduce the difference between the held balls. can be done. Therefore, in the first special symbol, the upper limit number (in this embodiment, 4) is reached, and in the second special symbol, the upper limit number (in this embodiment, 4) is less than (for example, 1 etc.), When trying to reserve the second special symbol reserved balls up to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), the game balls are alternately distributed by the distribution winning device 630, so that the game balls are also placed in the first winning opening 63a. It is possible to prevent the problem of winning and overflowing.

Also, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 or more, by determining the difference between the reserved balls, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). Until there is one remaining pattern, the short-time off variation pattern is not selected, and the short-time off variation pattern is frequently selected, so that the player cannot fully enjoy the performance due to the variation of the special symbol, and the game does not start. You can avoid getting bored. In addition, by selecting a short-time loss variation pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the lottery result is a loss before stopping the special symbols and not having a sense of expectation for the big win. be able to.

Also, by selecting a relatively long variation pattern (variation pattern of Super Reach C, etc.), even if a difference in the number of held balls occurs, by selecting a variation pattern that is off for a short time, the number of held balls Adjustments can be made to reduce the difference. Therefore, the overflow can be reduced, and many variation patterns with a relatively long variation time (super reach C variation pattern, etc.) are selected, allowing the player to enjoy the performance by the variation of the special symbols, It is possible to prevent boredom in the game. Therefore, it is possible to perform a variety of productions, and it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the selection of the variation pattern can be restricted (for example, the ratio of selecting the variation pattern such as Super Reach C is extremely reduced). can.

Also, in the pachinko machine 10, the prize distribution device 630 alternately distributes to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. Therefore, when the difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 1, the difference between the second special symbol and the second special symbol is 1, so that the variation pattern that is out of the short time is not selected. It is determined whether or not there are two or more differences between the 2 special symbols and the reserved balls. Therefore, even when the prizes are evenly distributed by the distribution winning device 630, it is possible to prevent frequent selection of fluctuation patterns that are short-time off.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is a hit, it is configured so as not to select the variation pattern for adjustment. By configuring in this manner, a variation pattern indicating a normal win can be selected as the variation pattern that will result in a win, and an effect of the variation pattern that will sufficiently win the player can be performed. In addition, when the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a hit, the jackpot game is started after the fluctuation is stopped, so there is no need to deal with troubles such as overflow even if the fluctuation pattern for adjustment is not selected. .

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 or more. Also, without determining the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, it is of course possible to directly determine the difference in the number of reserved balls between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more, but the number may be three or more, or any other number may be set as appropriate. You may

Further, in the present embodiment, there is one type of variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds, but not limited to this, variation patterns with different variation times, for example, are varied by 0.5 seconds. (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) A plurality of variation patterns may be provided for selection. As for selection, it may be selected by the counter value in the same manner as the selection of other variation patterns, or the state of the second special symbol holding balls (number of holding balls, difference in holding balls, reserved may be selected based on the previously determined fluctuation time, etc.), or if the second special symbol is fluctuating, it may be configured to be selected based on the remaining time.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference between the second special symbol and the reserved ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of the short-time off variation pattern, to allow the player to play the game with the performance of the normal variation pattern, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal time is selected, but a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of out of normal A) is selected from the normal fluctuation pattern table. can be configured to By configuring in this way, the player can vary the special symbols in a variation pattern that is not normal, and it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity when the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

As for the second special symbol, as with the first special symbol, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) in the first embodiment. And the second special symbol variation start process (Figure 20, S203) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (Figure 15, S107) is executed instead of the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (Figure 22, S710). .

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment, in each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320), the first is second, and the second is changed to the first one, and the detailed description and effects are the same, so the description and illustration thereof are omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the difference between the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (two or more in this embodiment), the variation pattern is short-time off. is selected, but it is not limited to that, and is not limited to the case where the result of the right or wrong determination is out, and the variation pattern selected by the other special symbol is determined, so that the difference in the number of pending balls disappears. It may be configured to select a variation pattern. Specifically, if the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two more than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern selected by the reserved balls of the second special symbol is a relatively short variation pattern, then Select a shorter variation pattern (for example, a variation time of 0.5 seconds). should be

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust the difference between the held balls while performing a more natural fluctuation of the special symbols. Therefore, the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a special deviation variation pattern table for adjustment, it is configured to provide a variation pattern table dedicated to short-time deviation, but not limited to that, in normal variation patterns (both hits and deviations), the first A variation pattern for adjustment (for example, a short-time variation of 0.5 seconds) is set in the address, and the top address is selected according to the difference in the ball held, and the variation pattern for adjustment is selected. may

In this embodiment, the distribution device 630 has explained the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b. Even in a configuration in which game balls randomly enter the 63a and the second starting port 63b, the configuration of the present embodiment can adjust the difference in the number of reserved balls to be uniform.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment, when there is a difference of a predetermined number or more in the state of the held balls, a variation pattern that is out for a short time is selected and adjusted to reduce the difference. explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, under the same reserved ball conditions as in the first embodiment, the variation pattern with fewer reserved balls is first A variation pattern is selected in which the time until the special symbol corresponding to the holding ball that starts variation stops varying is the variation time.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in the following points. In the third embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 adjusts the fluctuation time of the special symbol with fewer reserved balls, thereby reducing the difference between the reserved balls of the second embodiment. is different from the pachinko machine 10 in .

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Elements that are the same as in the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

44, in the third embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 44, S203) of the third embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing for the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment. 2 (FIG. 43, S320), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the third embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 45, in the third embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 44, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 3 (S330) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (S330). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, when the success/failure determination result is out, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is smaller than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by a predetermined number or more due to the number of the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, the processing is to select a variation pattern for adjusting the difference.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), each process from S534 to S536 is changed from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, only the changed points will be described in detail.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330), when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S531: No), the number of held balls of the second special symbol is 3. It is determined whether or not there are more than one (S534). The number of second special symbol reserved balls is determined based on the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f. When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special design is 3 or more (S534: Yes), the number of reserved balls of the first special design is subtracted from the number of reserved balls of the second special design. It is determined whether the value is two or more (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is two or more than the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) (S535). Here, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used for determination.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol by two or more (S535: Yes), based on the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u, the second special symbol is selected from the present time. The time until the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the first reservation (the reservation area with the earliest change order among the reservation areas of the second special symbol) is completed as the fluctuation time Special deviation fluctuation for the first adjustment A pattern command is set.

Here, the value of the second variation time storage area 203t and the variation pattern type storage area 203u3 of the reservation area with the earliest variation order among the reservation areas of the second special symbol in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u. The variation time is calculated by adding the value of the variation time indicated by the variation pattern. It should be noted that when the first adjustment special non-adjustment fluctuation pattern is selected, the selection of the fluctuation pattern in the process of S539 is skipped, and the next process of S540 is executed.

Thus, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (three or more in this embodiment), and the difference between the reserved balls is two or more. In the case of (the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is smaller), it consists of the fluctuation time until the fluctuation of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved ball with the earliest change order among the reserved balls of the second special pattern is completed. selected variation pattern is selected. Therefore, one reserved ball of the second special pattern is digested, and the second special pattern reserved ball is not digested until the second is about to be digested, so the digestion speed of the first special pattern reserved ball is reduced. It can be adjusted so that it becomes slower and the difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is reduced.

Further, by discriminating whether or not there are three or more reserved balls of the second special symbol, frequent selection of a variation pattern for adjustment and impairing the performance of the game can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is a hit, it is configured so as not to select the variation pattern for adjustment. By configuring in this manner, a variation pattern indicating a normal win can be selected as the variation pattern that will result in a win, and an effect of the variation pattern that will sufficiently win the player can be performed. In addition, when the result of judging whether or not the first special symbol is a hit, the jackpot game is started after the fluctuation is stopped, so there is no need to deal with troubles such as overflow even if the fluctuation pattern for adjustment is not selected. .

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 3 or more. Also, without determining the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, it is of course possible to directly determine the difference in the number of reserved balls between the second special symbol and the first special symbol.

Also, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol by two or more, but the number may be three or more, or any other number may be set as appropriate. You may

Also, in the present embodiment, the variation time until the variation of the first reserved special symbol is completed is selected. It may have a long variation time. Alternatively, a variation time longer than the variation time of the special symbol reserved first may be selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time until the variation of the first reserved special symbol ends is selected, but the variation pattern of the variation time close to the variation time or the variation time longer than that is selected. may be selected from the normal fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)). By configuring in this way, the player can vary the special symbols in a variation pattern that is not normal, and it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity when the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

Also, the configurations of the second embodiment and the third embodiment may be combined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference between the reserved balls at the timing when both special symbols fluctuate, and it is possible to respond more quickly.

As for the second special symbol, each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 3 (FIG. 45, S330) is similar to the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment. , only the first is changed to the second and the second to the first, and the detailed description and effects are the same, so the description and illustration thereof are omitted.

Also, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more, but the number may be three or more, or any other number may be set as appropriate. You may

Further, in the present embodiment, there is one type of variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds, but not limited to this, variation patterns with different variation times, for example, are varied by 0.5 seconds. (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, etc.) A plurality of variation patterns may be provided for selection. As for selection, it may be selected by the counter value in the same manner as the selection of other variation patterns, or the state of the second special symbol holding balls (number of holding balls, difference in holding balls, reserved may be selected based on the previously determined fluctuation time, etc.), or if the second special symbol is fluctuating, it may be configured to be selected based on the remaining time.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference between the second special symbol and the reserved ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of selection of the short-time off variation pattern, to allow the player to play the game with the performance of the normal variation pattern, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal time is selected, but a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern of out of normal A) is selected from the normal fluctuation pattern table. can be configured to By configuring in this way, the player can vary the special symbols in a variation pattern that is not normal, and it is possible to reduce the player's sense of incongruity when the variation pattern for adjustment is selected.

In this embodiment, the distribution device 630 has explained the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b. Even in a configuration in which game balls randomly enter the 63a and the second starting port 63b, the configuration of the present embodiment can adjust the difference in the number of reserved balls to be uniform.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described second embodiment, when there is a difference of a predetermined number or more in the state of the held balls, a variation pattern that is out for a short time is selected and adjusted to reduce the difference. explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game balls have successively entered either the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, and the player has continuously won a prize. In this case, the variation pattern of the special symbols corresponding to the winning consecutively is selected to be out of the variation pattern for a short period of time, and adjusted so as to reduce the difference of the reserved balls.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in the following points. In the second embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball has continuously won in one of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, the second implementation in terms of selecting a variation pattern out of short time It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in form.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device The various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Elements that are the same as in the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 46 is a diagram schematically showing part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment.

The first winning flag 203v1 is a flag indicating that the game ball has won the first starting port 63a. Specifically, the first winning flag 203v1 is set when a game ball wins the first starting port 63a in the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960), and the first winning flag 203v1 is OFF. A flag that is set on if On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second starting port 63b, it is set to OFF.

The second winning flag 203v2 is the same as the first winning flag 203v1 except for the second starting port 63b, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

By configuring in this way, by the distribution winning device 630, without being alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, for example, when the game ball wins continuously in the first start port 63a When the game ball wins the first starting port 63a for the second time, the first winning flag 203v1 is already set to ON, and it is determined whether or not the first starting port 63a wins consecutively. configured to allow

The first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is a flag indicating that the game balls have won consecutively in the first starting port 63a. Specifically, in the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) described later, when the game ball has won the first starting port 63a, when the first winning flag 203v1 is already set to ON is a flag that is set on when On the other hand, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), which will be described later, when the adjustment special deviation variation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set in the process of S526, it is set to OFF.

The second consecutive winning flag 203v4 is the same as the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 except for the second starting port 63b, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b has been continuously won. Therefore, by selecting a variation pattern for adjustment based on the fact that the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 or the second winning flag 203v4 is set to ON, it is possible to easily hold the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It can be configured to reduce the ball difference.

With reference to FIG. 47, timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt processing of the fourth embodiment, a part of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 15, S107) is changed with respect to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) of the second embodiment, and the start winning processing (FIG. 24, S108), a start winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120) is added.

48, in the fourth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 47) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 48, S203) of the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing for the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 42, S203) of the second embodiment. 2 (FIG. 43, S320), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the fourth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the second embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 49, in the fourth embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 48, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 4 (S340) will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (S340). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In particular, if the success/failure determination result is out, it is determined whether the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is ON (that is, whether the game balls have continuously won in the first starting port 63a), and if it is ON, This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern that is out of short time in order to adjust the difference.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), each process from S554 to S556 is changed from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 43, S320) in the second embodiment. Since the other processes are the same, only the changed points will be described in detail.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340), when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S551: No), whether the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is on (That is, whether or not game balls have entered the first starting port 63a consecutively) is determined (S554). When it is determined that the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is ON (S554: Yes), the adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is set, and the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is set OFF. (S556).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is off (S554: No), the value obtained by subtracting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2. It is determined whether or not there are more than one (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more) (S555). Here, it is judged by the value obtained by subtracting the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e.

When it is determined that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more (S555: Yes), the process of S556 is executed. On the other hand, if the result of subtracting the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is determined to be less than 2 (S555: No), the special deviation variation according to the game state A pattern table 202e is set. When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. Also, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set.

By configuring in this way, if the prize is not alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution prize winning device 630, and if one of them wins continuously, it will be out for a short time. Since the variation pattern is selected, the hold of the winners in succession can be digested quickly, and the status can be substantially the same as that of alternately distributed winners. Therefore, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference in the retained balls between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Also, when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is off, the difference between the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 2). or more), and if the number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a fluctuation pattern that is out of short time is selected. As a result, in the distribution winning device 630, even if alternately distributed, the difference in the number of reserved balls of a predetermined number or more due to the difference in the variation pattern (variation time) selected between the first special symbol and the second special symbol Even if (for example, two or more) occurs, by selecting a variation pattern that is off for a short time, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference between the held balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is off, the difference between the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined, but not limited to this, the same as in the second embodiment. In addition, it may be determined whether the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more). By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game due to the frequent selection of the short-time off variation pattern and the player not being able to fully enjoy the performance due to the variation of the special symbols. In addition, by selecting a short-time loss variation pattern, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the lottery result is a loss before stopping the special symbols and not having a sense of expectation for the big win. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first consecutive winning flag 203v is ON, the adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) is configured to be set. When the flag 203v is ON, the process of S555 is executed, and when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is greater than the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by two or more, the adjustment special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 41) may be set. By configuring in this way, even when the first starting port 63a is consecutively won, if the difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the normal variation pattern is performed. It can be configured to select, and it is possible to suppress the frequent selection of a short-time off variation pattern.

As for the second special symbol, each process of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 4 (FIG. 49, S340) is similar to the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (not shown) in the second embodiment. , only the first is changed to the second and the second to the first, and the detailed description and effects are the same, so the description and illustration thereof are omitted.

Referring to FIG. 50, start winning process 2 (S120), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 47) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120). The starting winning process 2 (FIG. 50, S120) of the fourth embodiment is the first continuous winning determination process (FIG. 51, S906) and the second Continuous win determination processing (S980) is added. The processes from S901 to S914 in the fourth embodiment are the same as the processes from S901 to S914 in the second embodiment. In the process of S901, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 63a (S901: Yes), the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960) is executed.

In the first consecutive winning determination process (FIG. 51, S960), first, whether or not the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON (that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first starting port 63a last time) is determined. (S961). When it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is ON, the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is set to ON (S962). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first winning flag 203v1 is OFF (that is, the game ball has won the second starting port 63b last time) (S961: No), the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON. (S963). After that, the second winning flag 203v2 is set to OFF (S964).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not the game balls have successively entered the first start port 63a without alternately entering the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 is ON, it is configured to select a variation pattern that is out of a short time, but it is determined whether the second consecutive winning flag 203v4 is ON, When it is on, similarly to the third embodiment, a variation pattern composed of the variation time until the special symbol stops varying for the one with the earliest variation start order among the holding of the second special symbols. You may make it select. By configuring in this way, it is possible to adjust so as to reduce the difference in the retained balls between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

It should be noted that the second consecutive winning judgment process (S907) is different from the first consecutive winning judgment process (FIG. 51, S960) by changing the first to the second and the second to the first. , detailed illustration and description are omitted.

In this embodiment, the first winning flag 203v1 and the second winning flag 203v2 are respectively provided, but it is also possible to provide only one of them and make a determination based on whether it is on or off. . Specifically, when configured with only the first winning flag 203v1, when the first winning flag 203v1 is set to ON, the first starting port 63a wins, and the first winning flag 203v1 is turned OFF. When it is set, it is determined that the second starting port 63b wins. By configuring in this manner, the number of flags and the like can be reduced, and the required capacity of the RAM can be reduced. The same applies to the first consecutive winning flag 203v3 and the second consecutive winning flag 203v4.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when two consecutive winnings are made to one starting port, the variation pattern for adjustment is determined, and the case of adjusting the difference in the held ball is described. In the special design, when the variation of the special design is completed two times or more continuously during the period from the start to the end of the variation of the special design once, the variation pattern for adjustment is determined. You may Further, by combining the consecutive wins and the consecutive fluctuations, it is possible to adjust the difference of the reserved balls to be more uniform.

In this embodiment, the distribution device 630 has explained the case where the game balls are evenly distributed to the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b. Even in a configuration in which game balls randomly enter the 63a and the second starting port 63b, the configuration of the present embodiment can adjust the difference in the number of reserved balls to be uniform.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 55. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the pending symbol displayed in the lower display area Ds is displayed on the frame button 22 by the pending number display update process (FIG. 37, S1406) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. is operated, and the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is turned on is rearranged and displayed in the order of starting fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON in the pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. The reserved design display corresponding to the reserved area is rearranged in the order of starting the fluctuation, and the background of the reserved design display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON (the reserved design display is displayed (background to be displayed) blinks (flash display).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in the following points. In the fifth embodiment, the reserved design display area (any of Ds1 to Ds8 ) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the background screen of ) blinks (flashes) to indicate that the rearrangement has been completed.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a display from before rearrangement to after rearrangement of the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment. Before rearrangement, the reserved display pattern corresponding to the order of winning the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b in the lower display area Ds (if the reserved pattern display is based on winning the first starting port 63a, "○" is displayed, and "●" is displayed in the case of a reserved symbol display based on the winning of the second starting port 63b. In this embodiment, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b are alternately distributed by the distribution winning device 630, so the reserved design display of the first special design and the second special design is likely to be displayed alternately.

After that, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the reserved symbol display is rearranged, and the reserved symbol display is rearranged in the order of starting the variation. Then, the background is flashed (indicated by hatching in FIG. 52) with respect to the reserved symbol display displayed at that time (in FIG. 52, the reserved symbol display displayed in Ds1 to Ds5). After that, with respect to the reserved symbol display for the game ball newly winning the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order (the order in which the winning is established), and the pending symbol display is displayed. The pattern display areas (Ds6 to Ds7 in FIG. 52) are displayed with normal background patterns (for example, blue background color) without blinking.

In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, the background of the reserved symbol display area is displayed blinking with respect to the displayed reserved symbol display, whereby the player executes rearrangement. The reserved symbol display can be easily recognized. Therefore, it is possible to easily identify whether the order in which the pending symbol display is displayed is the order of winning or the order of starting the variation. Therefore, player confusion can be suppressed.

In addition, with respect to the reserved symbol display that has won after the rearrangement is executed, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order, and the background of the reserved symbol display area remains the normal background, so that the player can , it is possible to easily identify that the displayed pending symbol display is the one before rearrangement. Further, since the background display keeps blinking for the rearranged reserved symbol display, the player can recognize the reserved symbol display before rearrangement and after rearrangement at once. be able to.

In addition, when the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display starts to fluctuate, the reserved symbol display is erased (digested), and each displayed reserved symbol display is shifted one by one to the right reserved symbol display area and displayed. However, since the blinking display of the background is also shifted and displayed accordingly, the player can easily identify the rearranged reserved symbol display even if the reserved symbol display is cleared. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the background is displayed blinking as a notification mode indicating the reserved symbol display that has been rearranged. It may be configured to change to red when executed), or the display may be appropriately changed by blinking, changing the color, or adding a pattern instead of the background. Furthermore, it may be configured to notify by voice, text, etc. (for example, display voice or text saying "up to the third reserved pattern has been rearranged").

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing this main process (FIG. 53, S1400). The main process (FIG. 53, S1400) of the fifth embodiment replaces the pending number display update process (FIG. 37, S1406) with respect to the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. Pending sorting process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is added instead of process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) and pending sorting process (FIG. 40, S1413). The processes of S1401 to S1405 in the fifth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1405 is completed, the pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 54, pending number display update process 2 (S1440), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 53, S1400) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process 2 (S1440). The pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is a process for setting a command for displaying the pending symbol display in the pending symbol display areas (Ds1 to Ds8) of the lower display area Ds.

In the pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each pending area of the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k is updated (S1441). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the updating of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may of course be performed by other methods.

The reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved area in which the sorting flag 223k7 of the subordinate sorting reserved storage area 223k is turned on is the reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area in which the sorting flag 223k7 is turned off in the variable display start order. As for the symbol display, the suspended symbol display is displayed in the order in which the suspension is established (S1442).

The background of the pending symbol display area displaying the pending symbol display corresponding to the pending area of the subordinate sorting pending storage area 223k in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed by blinking (flash), and the sorting flag 223k7 is displayed. Generate a background display change command that causes the display control device 114 to display the background of the reserved pattern display area in which the reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area where is off is the normal background (for example, blue in this embodiment) (S1443).

In this way, by flashing the background of the reserved symbol display area where the reserved symbol display of the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed, the player is informed that the rearrangement has been executed. It is possible to notify that it is a pattern display. Therefore, the player can recognize that the displayed pending symbol display is displayed in the order of starting the fluctuation by the notification mode.

In addition, the background of the reserved pattern display area in which the reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area in which the sort flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed blinking, and the reserved area in which the sort flag 223k7 is set to OFF (That is, after the rearrangement is executed, the reserved symbol display corresponding to the reserved symbol display is displayed.) The background of the reserved symbol display area is displayed with a normal background, so that the player can It is possible to easily recognize the reserved symbol display that has been executed and the reserved symbol display that has not been rearranged.

Also, every time this pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) is executed, a new background display change command is generated. Even when the pattern starts to fluctuate and the reservation is terminated, the display of the reserved pattern and the blinking display indicating that the rearrangement has been executed can be appropriately updated according to the state.

Further, the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set by the operation of the frame button 22 during the rearrangement possible period (in this embodiment, the is pressed), all pending areas in which pending data is stored are set to ON. As a result, all of the displayed pending symbol displays are rearranged and displayed based on the pending variable display start order from the pending establishment order. On the other hand, after the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, regarding the newly stored reservation, since the rearrangement flag 223k7 is OFF, the order established without being rearranged, that is, the third symbol display device 81 It is displayed at the end of the reserved design display displayed in .

Therefore, when the player intends to rearrange the reserved symbol display and operates the frame button 22, the reserved symbol display displayed at that time is rearranged in the variable display start order. Also, the rearranged pending symbol display is maintained in the variable display start order, while the pending symbol display corresponding to the newly stored (occurring) pending is displayed first in the establishment order. Since it is displayed at the end without being interrupted by the reserved pattern display that is being displayed, the player can suppress the inconvenience that the current display is confused in which order it is displayed. can be done.

By rearranging only the reserved pattern displays displayed when the frame button 22 is operated in this way, the variable display start order can be notified only when the player wants to know.

Also, usually, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the hold for the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the change display start time is earlier in the hold that occurs later in the order of establishment occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the hold for the big win. In such a case, when the reserved patterns are rearranged, the reserved patterns whose formation order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved patterns whose formation order is earlier (on the side of the reserved pattern display area Ds1). be. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the display of the reserved symbols, if the reserved symbols whose establishment order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved symbols whose establishment order is early, Among the reserved patterns displayed before the interrupted reserved pattern, the reserved pattern caused by the prize winning to the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the interrupted reserved pattern is considered to be a big hit. can have hope.

Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22, the player can operate the frame button in anticipation of a change in the arrangement order, thinking that there may be a big hit pending in the pending symbol display. , the frame button 22 can be operated with anticipation for the big win. Further, when the frame button 22 is operated, a sound is output, so that the expectation for the big win can be amplified and produced.

Returning to the main processing (FIG. 53, S1400), the description continues. The processes of S1407 to S1412 in the fifth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1407 to S1412 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1412 is completed, the pending rearrangement process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 55, pending rearrangement process 2 (S1450), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 53, S1400) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing this reservation sorting process 2 (S1450). In the pending sorting process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450), when the frame button 22 is operated during the sorting possible period of the pending symbol display, it is notified that the sorting has been executed (executed). This is a process for setting the rearrangement notification sound command and setting the rearrangement flag 223k7 of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k to ON.

In the pending rearrangement process 2 (FIG. 55, S1450), first, it is determined whether or not it is a rearrangeable period (S1451). During the rearrangement possible period, the game state other than the state of no reservation established in the jackpot game or different start ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is no one or more reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is arranged. It is set in the exchangeable period.

If it is determined that it is the sortable period (S1451: Yes), a display button operation display command is generated (S1452). When the display control device 114 receives this display button operation display command, the third pattern display device 81 displays characters such as "Perhaps rearrangement is possible!" The period is reported. The notification mode is not limited to this, and may be performed by voice or the like, or may naturally be configured to control so as to turn on a dedicated lamp or the like.

In addition, in this embodiment, by providing a rearrangement possible period, the player can easily recognize the timing at which the rearrangement operation becomes possible, and can operate the frame switch 22 at an appropriate timing. can. In addition, the rearrangement period is not particularly provided, and when the frame button 22 is operated, if the rearrangement is possible, the rearrangement display may be performed.

It is determined whether the frame button 22 is operated (S1453). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (S1453: Yes), a rearrangement notification sound command is set (S1454). The rearrangement notification sound command causes the voice output device 226 to output a notification sound indicating that the rearrangement is (has been) executed (in this embodiment, a voice saying "reorder").

In addition, in the present embodiment, voice is used, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a specific sound effect (for example, fanfare music, etc.) is output. The output time may be appropriately set in accordance with the effect, and may be constructed such that a dedicated melody or sound effect is output all the time while the rearranged reserved pattern display is being displayed. With this configuration, the player can be strongly aware that the rearrangement has been executed, and can easily understand that the reserved symbol display is rearranged.

The rearrangement flags 223k7 of all the reserved areas in which the reserved data of the secondary rearranged reserved storage area 223k are stored are set to ON (S1455).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the sortable period (S1451: No) and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1453: No), this process is terminated. With this configuration, when the player wants to rearrange, only the pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be rearranged.

The player can know the actual order of starting the variable display, and can know in advance the special symbol to be noticed next (special symbol to start the variable display). Therefore, the game can be played while assuming the display area to be viewed in advance, and the game can be played smoothly.

In addition, in the configuration of the pachinko machine, the sorting device 630 alternately alternates between the first start port 63a and the second start port 64a so that the game balls can easily win the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The game can be played evenly, and the game can be played efficiently.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the rearrangement of the reserved symbols is executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, but is not limited to this, and is executed each time a new reserved pattern is stored. Of course, it may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the player can always accurately recognize the variable display start order from the reserved symbols rearranged in the variable start order.

In this embodiment, the rearrangement possible period is other than the state in which there is no reservation during the jackpot game or in different starting ports 63a and 63b (the state in which there is no more than one reservation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). However, it is not limited to this, and the sortable period may be set during the jackpot game. It may be set to something other than this, and may be determined as appropriate.

In addition, when the jackpot game is set as the rearrangement possible period, it is necessary to perform the rearrangement in consideration of the remaining fluctuation time of the temporarily stopped fluctuation display during the fluctuation display. Specifically, the variation start time is calculated based on the determined variation time (variation display mode) of the reserved first special symbol or second special symbol and the remaining variation time during the temporary stop. Then, the sorting order is determined, and sorting is performed based on the sorting order. By configuring in this way, even if a new reserved display mode is displayed during the jackpot game, the reserved display mode and the display mode already displayed before the reserved display mode is displayed are combined. , rearrangement can be performed in an accurate variation start order, and the accurate variation start order can be notified to the player even in the jackpot game machine.

Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the reserved pattern display area is displayed blinking for all the reserved pattern displays displayed in the reserved pattern display area. explained the case.

On the other hand, in the modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment, rearrangement is executed, and the background of the pending symbol display area is displayed only for the pending symbol display of the fluctuation start order that is different from the establishment order. blinks.

That is, the modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in the following points. In the modified example of the fifth embodiment, in the reserved number display update process 2 (FIG. 57, S1440), in the reserved area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON, the reserved area with the variable start order different from the winning order is reserved. This differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in that a background display change command is generated to flash the background of the reserved pattern display area where the pattern display is displayed.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the fifth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the pending symbol display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from before rearrangement to after rearrangement in the modification of the fifth embodiment. Before rearrangement, the reserved design display of the first special design ("○" in this embodiment) and the reserved design display of the second special design ("●" in this embodiment) are displayed in order of formation. . Due to the rearrangement being executed by operating the frame button 22 by the player, the reserved design display "○" of the first special design displayed in the reserved design display area Ds3 and the reserved design display "○" displayed in the reserved design display area Ds4. The reserved symbol display "●" of the second special symbol is rearranged, and its background is blinking to indicate that the rearrangement has been performed (notification form).

Generally, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the hold for the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the change display start time is earlier in the hold that occurs later in the order of establishment occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the hold for the big win. In such a case, when the reserved patterns are rearranged, the reserved patterns whose formation order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved patterns whose formation order is earlier (on the side of the reserved pattern display area Ds1). be.

Here, the background blinks only for the reserved symbol display whose display order is changed by executing rearrangement, with the establishment order and the variation start order being different. Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the display of the reserved symbols, the reserved symbols whose establishment order is late interrupt before the reserved symbols whose establishment order is early, and the order is changed. The displayed reserved symbol display can be easily recognized. Therefore, among the pending symbols displayed before the interrupting and displayed pending symbols, the holding caused by winning the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the interrupting and displayed pending symbols is a jackpot. We can have high hopes.

In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, the player may operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of a change in the arrangement order, thinking that there may be a big hit pending in the pending symbol display. and the frame button 22 can be operated with a feeling of anticipation for the big win.

In addition, in order to indicate that the sorting has been executed, when the display order of the pending symbol display is changed, the background is displayed blinking, and furthermore, for the pending symbol display that was displayed when the sorting was executed Alternatively, the rearranged reserved symbol display may be identified by displaying the background in a special color (for example, red). With such a configuration, the player can identify both the pending symbol display displayed when the rearrangement is executed and the pending symbol display the display order of which is changed by the rearrangement. Therefore, the player's confusion can be further suppressed.

57, in the modification of the fifth embodiment, pending number display update process 2 (FIG. 57, S1440) will be described.

The processing from S1441 to S1442 in the modified example of the fifth embodiment is the same as the processing from S1441 to S1442 in the fifth embodiment. In the modified example of the fifth embodiment, when the process of S1442 is executed, the order of winning and the order of start of variation among the reserve areas of the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k for which the sort flag 223k7 is set to ON are changed. It is determined whether there is a different reserved area (S1445). Here, the reservation area and the variable start order storage area 223k4 are discriminated to determine whether or not the order is different. Specifically, if the variable start order stored in the variable start order storage area 223k4 in the reserved area 2 is 3rd, the winning order is 2nd, but the variable start order is 3rd. , and it is determined that the order is different.

When it is determined that there is a reservation area in which the winning order and the order of starting fluctuation are different from each other in the reservation areas of the sub-reordering reservation storage area 223k for which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON (S1445: Yes) , Of the reserved areas in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON, the background of the reserved pattern display area in which the reserved pattern display corresponding to the reserved area determined to be different from the winning order and the fluctuation start order is displayed is blinking. A background display change command to be displayed (changed) is generated (S1446).

In this way, when the rearrangement is executed, the displayed reserved symbol display and the reserved symbol display whose display order has been changed are displayed with a blinking background, so that the player can see that the order has been changed. reserved symbols can be identified.

In addition, the notification mode for notifying the pending symbol display whose display order has been changed is not limited to blinking display, it may be indicated by character display, may be notified by voice, not blinking display, other display It may be a mode, and the reserved symbol display may be displayed in a special color or pattern.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, when the frame button 22 is operated, the background of the reserved pattern display area is displayed blinking for all the reserved pattern displays displayed in the reserved pattern display area. explained the case.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, in the lower display area Ds, the pending symbol display before sorting is displayed in the winning order before sorting Dsa and the variation after sorting A rearranged reserved display area Dsb is provided in which the reserved symbol displays are displayed in the order of starting . Until the frame button 22 is operated, the reserved pattern display is displayed only in the pre-arrangement reserved display area Dsa in winning order, and when the frame button 22 is operated, the reserved pattern display displayed at that time changes. are displayed in the reserved display area Dsb after rearrangement in the order of starting .

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in the following points. The sixth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in that the pending symbol display is displayed in the winning order and, apart from that, the pending symbol display is displayed in the order of starting variation.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same elements as in the fifth embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing pending symbol displays displayed on the third symbol display device 81 before sorting (unperformed sorting) and after sorting (performed sorting) in the sixth embodiment. . Before sorting, the reserved design display area (Ds1 to Ds5) of the pre-sorting reserved display area Dsa holds the reserved design of the first special design (in this embodiment, "○") and the reserved design of the second special design. The display (“●” in this embodiment) is displayed in order of winning. At this time, the reserved design display is not displayed in the rearranged reserved display area Dsb.

When the player operates the frame button 22 and sorting is executed, after sorting, the reserved symbol display is displayed in the winning order in the pre-sorting reserved display area Dsa. In the reserved display area Dsb, the reserved symbol displays displayed in the pre-arrangement reserved display area Dsa at that time are displayed in the order of starting to change.

In this way, when the sorting is executed, the reserved symbol displays before sorting and after sorting are displayed side by side vertically, so that the player can see how the sorting is done. It is possible to recognize by comparing the reserved design display in the pre-replacement reserved display area Dsa and the reserved design display in the post-rearrangement reserved display area Dsb. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize the pending symbol display whose order is different from the winning order in the order of starting the variation.

Generally, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the hold for the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the change display start time is earlier in the hold that occurs later in the order of establishment occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the hold for the big win. In such a case, when the reserved patterns are rearranged, the reserved patterns whose formation order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved patterns whose formation order is earlier (on the side of the reserved pattern display area Ds1). be.

Here, the establishment order and the variation start order are different, and for the reserved symbol display whose display order is changed by executing the rearrangement, the reserved display area before rearrangement Dsa and the reserved display area after rearrangement Dsb are compared. can be easily recognized by Therefore, when the player operates the frame button 22 to rearrange the display of the reserved symbols, the reserved symbols whose establishment order is late interrupt before the reserved symbols whose establishment order is early, and the order is changed. The displayed reserved symbol display can be easily recognized. Therefore, among the pending symbols displayed before the interrupting and displayed pending symbols, the holding caused by winning the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the interrupting and displayed pending symbols is a jackpot. We can have high hopes.

In this way, when the player operates the frame button 22, the player may operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of a change in the arrangement order, thinking that there may be a big hit pending in the pending symbol display. and the frame button 22 can be operated with a feeling of anticipation for the big win.

In the present embodiment, in the rearranged reserved display area Dsb, the reserved symbol display that was displayed when the frame button 22 was operated was displayed in the order of starting the fluctuation. The reserved drawings may be displayed in the reserved drawing display area Dsb after being rearranged in order of winning.

In addition, regardless of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the reserved symbol display before rearrangement and after rearrangement may naturally be displayed at all times. With this configuration, the player can always visually recognize the pending symbol display displayed in the order of winning and the order of starting the variation. It is possible to quickly recognize that there is a pattern display.

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this main process (FIG. 59, S1400). The main processing (FIG. 59, S1400) of the sixth embodiment is the holding number display update processing 2 (FIG. 54, S1440) in place of the main processing (FIG. 53, S1400) of the fifth embodiment. An update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is added. The processes of S1401 to S1405 in the sixth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1401 to S1405 in the first embodiment. When the process of S1405 is completed, the pending number display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 60, pending number display update process 3 (S1460), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 59, S1400) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process 3 (S1460). Reservation number display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460) is a reservation design in each reservation design display area (Ds1 to Ds8) of the reservation display area before rearrangement Dsa and the reservation display area after rearrangement Dsb of the lower display area Ds This is processing for setting a command for displaying the display.

In the pending number display update process 3 (FIG. 60, S1460), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each pending area of the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k is updated (S1461). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the updating of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may of course be performed by other methods.

It is determined whether or not the secondary rearrangement flag 223k7 of the reservation area 1 in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462). When it is determined that the secondary sort flag 223k7 of the reserve area 1 in the secondary sort reserve storage area 223k is set to ON (S1462: Yes), the sort flag is turned on in the after-sort reserve display area Dsb. A reserved display command for display is set to display the reserved pattern display in the reserved area set in the order in which the variation is started (S1463).

By controlling in this way, when the rearrangement is executed, only for the reserved design display that was displayed (the reservation area in which the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON), the after-rearrangement reservation display area Dsb It is possible to display the reserved design display on .

A reservation display command for display is generated to display the reservations stored in the reservation area in the pre-arrangement reservation display area Dsa in order of winning (S1464). Thereby, the pending symbol display can always be displayed in the winning order in the pre-rearrangement pending display area Dsa. Further, when the rearrangement flag 223k7 is ON, the reserved symbol display can be displayed in the reserved display area after rearrangement Dsb and the reserved display area before rearrangement Dsa.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the secondary sorting flag 223k7 of the reserve area 1 in the sorting reserve storage area 223k is set to OFF (S1462: No), the process of S1464 is executed. As a result, when the sorting flag is off in the reserve area 1 (that is, all the reserve areas), the reserve symbol display is displayed in the winning order only in the pre-sort reserve display area Dsa, and the sorting is executed. It is possible to make the player easily recognize that it is not done.

Further, in a state where sorting is not executed, the reserved symbol display is not displayed in the post-sorting reserved display area Dsb until the player operates the frame button 22, so that the player operates the frame button 22. Sometimes, it is possible to increase the change in the display when the reserved symbol display is displayed in the reserved display area Dsb after rearrangement, thereby making the player more motivated to execute the rearrangement.

In this embodiment, the sorting flag 223k7 is determined only in the reservation area 1, but it is not limited to this, and the sorting flags of all the reservation areas in which various data are stored may be determined. Naturally, it may be configured to determine whether is on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the post-sorting reserved display area Dsb is configured to be always displayed, but not limited to this, always, only the pre-sorting reserved display area Dsa is displayed and sorting is performed. When (when the player operates the frame switch 22), the rearranged reserved display area Dsb is displayed, and when all the rearranged reserved symbol displays are extinguished (variation starts), it is automatically hidden. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the sorting period is reached, a character notifying that the sorting is possible is displayed. (not shown) is displayed to inform the player that the reserved symbol display can be rearranged. By configuring in this way, the reserved display area Dsb after rearrangement is not normally displayed, and the space can be used as the upper display area Dm, and the variable display of the main pattern and the display of other production patterns can be performed. It can be displayed in a large space. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the result of the lottery that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, there is no hold during the jackpot game or at different starting ports 63a and 63b (a state in which there is no hold of one or more first special symbols and second special symbols). The case of setting the sortable period in a game state other than the above has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, it is set to be included in the rearrangement possible period even during the jackpot game.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot game starts, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 recalculates the time at which each hold variation starts after the jackpot game. Then, the rearrangement data is output to the sound ramp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 sets the rearrangement possible period even during the jackpot game, and executes the rearrangement. differ from

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 61, the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment, will be described. do. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103). The large open mouth opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103) of the seventh embodiment not only controls the opening/closing of the first variable winning device 65, but also changes each hold starting after the big win when the big win game starts. This is a process for recalculating the start time and generating rearranged data in the audio ramp control device 113 based on the recalculated data.

In the large opening opening/closing process (FIG. 61, S103), first, it is determined whether or not the big winning game is started (S131). The determination as to whether or not the start of the jackpot game is made in the process of S608 in the first special symbol variation stop process (Fig. 19, S204) or in the process of S808 in the second special symbol variation stop process (Fig. 23, S207). is determined by whether the start of is set.

When it is determined that the jackpot game is started (S131: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (S132: Yes), the fluctuation start time storage area 203u5 of each reservation area stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u The value is recalculated after the jackpot, taking into consideration the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol or second special symbol (S133). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not temporarily stopped (S132: No), the fluctuation start time storage area 203u5 of each reservation area stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is recalculated starting from after the big win (S134).

Based on the variable start time recalculated in the process of S133 or S134 and stored in the variable start time storage area 203u5, a rearrangement data command is generated for each reservation area (S135).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not started (S131: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is in progress (S136). If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being played (S136: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S136: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S137). When it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S137: Yes), a process of opening the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S138). A round command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (generated) (S139).

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not time to start a new round (S137: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is met (S140). When it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S140: Yes), the process of closing the large opening of the first variable winning device 65 is executed (S141).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the condition for closing the large opening in the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S140: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S142). If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S142: Yes), an ending command is set (generated) (S143).

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S142: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game is over (S144). When it is determined that the jackpot game has ended (S144: Yes), the jackpot game end is set (S145). It is determined whether or not it was a variable probability jackpot (S146). Whether or not it was a variable probability big win is determined whether the result of the lottery that triggered the execution of the big win game is a 15R variable probability big win or a 2R probability variable big win.

When it is determined that the probability variable jackpot was won (S146: Yes), the probability variable flag 203m is set to ON (S147). On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S144: No), or if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not set (S146: No), this process is terminated.

Thus, when the jackpot game starts, the fluctuation start time in each reservation area is updated after the jackpot game as a starting point. Therefore, even when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the jackpot game, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can also , the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k can be updated, and the reservation symbol display can be rearranged in the order of starting the variation after the big winning game.

In addition, it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped, and if it is temporarily stopped, the special symbol is reserved after the remaining fluctuation time has elapsed. By calculating the fluctuation start time as a starting point, a more accurate fluctuation start time can be calculated to generate the rearranged data command. Therefore, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 can rearrange the pending symbol display in a more accurate order of starting fluctuation based on the fluctuation start time indicated by the rearrangement data command.

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this main process (FIG. 62, S1400). The main processing (FIG. 62, S1400) of the seventh embodiment replaces the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) with respect to the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. 63, S1470) is added. The processing of S1401 to S1413 in the seventh embodiment is the same as the processing of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1413 is completed, command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is executed.

Command determination processing 2 (S1470), which is one processing of the main processing (FIG. 62, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 2 (S1470). Command determination processing 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 62, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the command received from the main control device 110. is the processing of

In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 63, S1470) of the seventh embodiment, S1520 and S1521 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. The processing of S1501 to S1518 in the seventh embodiment is the same as the processing of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment. If it is determined in the process of S1517 that the first or second special symbol variation restart command has not been received (S1517: No), the process of S1520 is executed.

In the process of S1520, it is determined whether or not the rearrangement data command output by main controller 110 has been received. If it is determined that the rearrangement data command has been received (S1520: Yes), the data in the variable start time storage area 223k5 of the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k is updated based on the received rearrangement data command. Here, the rearrangement data command is data indicating the recalculated fluctuation start time. Note that the rearrangement data command is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, and may of course be generated based on each data in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u. On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement data command has not been received (S1520: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S1519).

Although not described in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b during a jackpot game, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the first look-ahead process (Fig. 25, S907) or S942 of the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914), the fluctuation start time is calculated with the point after the end of the jackpot game as a starting point.

In this way, when the jackpot game is started, the variation start time of each suspension is recalculated starting from after the jackpot game ends, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a rearrangement data command, and is stored in the secondary rearrangement suspension memory. Since the value of the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5 of each reservation area of the area 223k is also updated, even if the jackpot game is set as the rearrangement possible period, the reservation symbol display can be rearranged in the order of the fluctuation start.

Also, even if the game ball wins the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b during the jackpot game, data indicating the fluctuation start time after the jackpot game ends is transmitted by the winning command, so the sound lamp control device 113 can rearrange the newly suspended reserved symbol display in order of start of fluctuation based on the fact that the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, even during a jackpot game that tends to be monotonous, the player can perform an operation to rearrange the reserved symbol displays and enjoy the game by rearranging the reserved symbol displays.

Generally, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, a relatively long variation pattern is selected. Therefore, the change display start time is delayed for the hold established at the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the hold for the big hit. Therefore, there is a case where the change display start time is earlier in the hold that occurs later in the order of establishment occurring at the start ports 63a and 63b different from the hold for the big win. In such a case, when the reserved patterns are rearranged, the reserved patterns whose formation order is late are interrupted and displayed before the reserved patterns whose formation order is earlier (on the side of the reserved pattern display area Ds1). be.

Therefore, even during the big win, the player can operate the frame button 22 to rearrange the display of the reserved symbols so that the reserved symbols displayed in front of the interrupted reserved symbols can be displayed as interrupting symbols. With respect to the suspension caused by the winning to the starting ports 63a and 63b different from the suspension symbols displayed in , it can be expected that it will be a big win.

In this way, the player operates the frame button 22 during the big win, and expects that the reserved symbol display will show a big win, and that the order of arrangement will change to see if the big win can be obtained in succession. By doing so, the frame button can be operated, and the enjoyment during the jackpot game can be increased.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 72. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-described first embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, the first look-ahead processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (Fig. 25, 907) or In the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914), a winning command is output to the audio lamp control device 113b, which is numbered in the order of the fluctuation start time and indicates the order, and rearrangement is executed based on the order. I explained the case where

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 performs the first look-ahead processing (Fig. 25 , 907) or in the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914), winning commands are generated for various counter values obtained based on the winning, without numbering in order of start of variation. When the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 receives the prize winning command, it calculates the fluctuation start time based on each counter value indicated by the prize winning command, assigns the fluctuation start order, and operates the frame button 22. Based on what has been done, rearrangement of the reserved symbol display is executed in that order.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the eighth embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 calculates and assigns a variation start order based on the received winning command, thereby rearranging the pending symbol display. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in form.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 64 is a diagram schematically showing part of the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth embodiment. The ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is provided with a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a special hit variation pattern table 222c, and a special loss variation pattern table 222d. These tables are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the special hit fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the special loss fluctuation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. , the description of which is omitted.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the rearrangement pending storage area 203u of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is deleted. Illustration of this is omitted.

In this way, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 also stores each table in the same manner as the ROM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As will be described later, the winning command from the main control device 110 indicates Based on each counter value, before the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display starts to change, the big hit is determined in advance and the variation pattern is selected, the variation start time is calculated, and arranged in the order in which the variation starts. The variable start order can be numbered based on the variable start time so that it can be changed. Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 does not need to execute each control process for determining the fluctuation start order in advance, and the control load can be reduced.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65 . FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the eighth embodiment is the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) instead of the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) in contrast to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the first embodiment. is added.

Referring to FIG. 66, start winning process 3 (S150), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 65) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the eighth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150). The starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) of the eighth embodiment replaces the first look-ahead process (FIG. 25, S907) with respect to the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment. Prefetching process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) replaces the second prefetching process (FIG. 27, S914), and second prefetching process 2 (S1060) is added.

Referring to FIG. 67, in the eighth embodiment, regarding the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) which is one process of the starting winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110. explain. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this first prefetching process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050). The first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) of the eighth embodiment is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start hole in the start winning process 3 (FIG. 66, S150), each counter value obtained It is a process for generating a winning command based on.

In the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), first, each counter value (special winning random number Counter C1, special hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1, variation pattern determination counter C4) are read out (S1051).

A winning command is generated based on each counter value (value read in S1051) newly stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (S1052). This winning command indicates each counter value, and is a command by which the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the winning order based on this winning command.

As for the second prefetching process 2 (S1060), the first prefetching process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050) is only changed from the first to the second, so illustration and detailed description thereof are omitted. do.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, in the first look-ahead process 2 (FIG. 67, S1050), based on the acquired counter value, big hit determination, variation pattern selection, variation start time calculation, variation start Since no sequence numbering or the like is performed, the control load on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning command is configured to be generated only for the newly established hold, but not limited to that, for all holds stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a may be configured to be generated again. By configuring in this way, the MPU 201 of the sound lamp control device 113 can update all the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k every time a game ball wins, and the data has been destroyed by noise or the like. Even in such a case, processing such as rearrangement can be performed by updating.

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing this main process (FIG. 68, S1400). The main processing (FIG. 68, S1400) of the eighth embodiment replaces the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) with respect to the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment. 69, S1490) replaces the pending sorting process (FIG. 40, S1413), and pending sorting process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480) is added.

Command determination process 3 (S1490), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 68, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 3 (S1490). In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, the process of S1530 is added instead of the processes of S1513 and S1514 to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. there is As for other processing, the same processing as the command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment is executed.

In the command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a winning command output from the main controller 110 has been received (S1512). When it is determined that a winning command has been received (S1512: Yes), each counter value (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, variation type counter CS1, variation pattern determination counter C4 ) is extracted and stored in the other memory area 223m in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 (S1530). Here, in the other memory area, the winning order indicated by the winning command (the winning order combining the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b) is stored so as to be identifiable for each counter value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1512: No), the process of S1517 is executed. Note that the subsequent processing has already been described in the first embodiment, and therefore will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, each counter value extracted from the winning command is stored in the other memory area 223m, but it is not limited to this, and may be stored in the corresponding reserve area of the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area 223m. good too. By configuring in this way, the winning order of each counter value can be determined by the reserved area, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced.

With reference to FIG. 70, pending sorting process 3 (S1480), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 68, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this reservation sorting process 3 (S1480). In the pending rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1490) of the eighth embodiment, S1811 and S1812 are added to the pending rearrangement process (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment. As for other processing, the same processing as the reservation rearrangement processing ( FIG. 40 , S1413) of the first embodiment is executed.

In the pending sorting process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480), first, in the command determination process 3 (FIG. 69, S1490), the winning command is received, and each counter value is stored in the other memory area 223m (that is, It is determined whether or not a winning command has been received (S1811). If it is determined that the winning command has been received (S1811: Yes), the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) is executed. The pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) will be described in detail later, but based on each counter value indicated by the received winning command, it is a process for determining the order of starting the variation of the pending symbol display. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S1811: No), the process of S1801 is executed. It should be noted that the processing from S1801 is the same as the processing from S1801 of the reservation rearrangement processing (FIG. 40, S1413) of the first embodiment, so detailed description will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 71, in the eighth embodiment, a pending rearrangement order determination process (S1812) which is one process of pending rearrangement process 3 (FIG. 70, S1480) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113. will be explained. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this pending rearrangement order determination process 3 (S1812). The reserved rearrangement order determination process 3 (FIG. 71, S1812) of the eighth embodiment is a process for determining the variable start order based on each counter value indicated by the winning command.

In the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812), first, each counter value (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, Variation type counter CS1, variation pattern determination counter C4) are read out (S1821).

The read data is stored in a reserve area corresponding to the winning order indicated by the winning commands in the sorting pending storage area 223k (in this embodiment, the winning commands are output in order of winning, so among the available storage areas, It may be stored in the area with the lowest winning order). A variable display start time for starting variable display based on the newly stored pending data (each counter value) is calculated (S1822).

As shown in FIG. 12, this fluctuation start time is the special symbol during the fluctuation display corresponding to the newly stored pending data (if the pending data is based on the first starting port 63a, the first special symbol, the second If the reserved data is based on the special pattern 63b, each reserved data previously stored based on the remaining fluctuation time of the second special pattern) and the same starting ports 63a and 63b as the newly stored reserved data is determined. It is calculated by adding each of the fluctuation times. Here, the remaining variable time is determined based on the secondary first variable time storage area 223i or the secondary secondary variable time storage area 223j.

Here, each pending data previously stored based on the same starting point as the newly stored pending data means that if the newly stored pending data is pending data based on the first starting point 63a, Based on the first starting port 63a stored in (corresponding to the first special symbol) pending data, on the other hand, if the newly stored pending data is based on the second starting port 63b, stored first It is the pending data (corresponding to the second special symbol) based on the second starting port 63b.

When the variable display start time is calculated, the post-rearrangement order is renumbered in ascending order of the variable display start time of all the pending data stored in the secondary sorting pending storage area 223k (S1823). Here, regarding the renumbering of the variable display start time, in the present embodiment, renumbering is performed for all pending data, but not limited to this, when the variable display start order is changed from the previous time, that is, If the variable display start order of the newly stored reserved data is interrupted by the previously stored variable display start order of the reserved data, it is of course possible to renumber only the changed order. good.

It is determined whether the game state at the start of fluctuation is a high probability game state (variable probability game state) (S1824). Here, the game state at the time of start of variation is determined by determining the special symbol whose variation is stopped and determined before the special symbol corresponding to the newly established hold starts to vary.

When it is determined that the game state at the start of fluctuation is a high probability game state (S1824: Yes), the first special symbol is determined based on the jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. is predicted, and the determination result is stored in the appropriateness judgment result storage area 223k1 of the reserved area of the corresponding secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k (S1825). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state at the start of the fluctuation is a low probability game state (normal game state) (S1824: No), the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability is used as the jackpot determination value. Based on this, the propriety of the first special symbol is predicted, and the judgment result is stored in the propriety judgment result storage area 223k1 of the reserve area of the corresponding secondary rearrangement reserve storage area 223k (S1826).

Next, the slave pending rearrangement storage area update process (FIG. 72) is executed (S1827). The secondary rearrangement storage area update process (FIG. 72, S1827) will be described in detail later, but it is based on the determination result of the hold data stored in the secondary rearrangement hold storage area 223k in the order in which the variable display is actually started. Then, the jackpot type (probability variable or not) and variation pattern (variation time) are determined based on each counter value and stored (updated).

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the secondary pending rearrangement storage area update process (S1827), which is one process of the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812), will be described. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the secondary pending rearrangement pending storage area update process (S1827).

In the secondary pending rearrangement pending storage area update process (FIG. 72, S1827), first, it is determined whether or not the winning judgment result predicted in the process of S1825 or S1826 in the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) was a jackpot. (S1831). If it is determined that the result of the judgment of whether or not the prediction was a jackpot in the processing of S1825 or S1826 in the pending rearrangement order determination processing (FIG. 71, S1812) (S1831: Yes), the predicted jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (15R probability variable It is determined whether it was a jackpot or a second R probability variable jackpot) (S1832). When it is determined that the predicted jackpot is a variable probability jackpot (S1832: Yes), the predictive reading probability variable flag 223k6 of the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k corresponding to the newly stored pending data is set to ON ( S1833). When the data is shifted to a higher reservation area and stored, the prefetch probability change flag 223k6 is set to OFF because the data in the reservation area before being shifted is cleared to 0. In other words, once the pre-reading probability variation flag 223k6 that has been set to ON is sequentially shifted in the reserved area, in the storage area of the changing data, when the next new data is shifted, it is overwritten (cleared to 0). set to off.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predicted jackpot is not the variable probability jackpot (that is, the 15R normal jackpot) (S1832: No), the process of S1834 is executed.

From the special per variation pattern table 222c corresponding to the game state at the start of the variation display (whether it is in probability variation or time saving), the special per type counter C2 of the newly stored pending data, the variation pattern determination counter C3 , the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation display is predicted based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S1834).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the success/failure determination result predicted in the process of S1825 or S1826 in the pending rearrangement order determination process (FIG. 71, S1812) is out (S1831: No), the game state at the start of the variable display Variation display starts based on the values of the fluctuation pattern determination counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 of the newly stored pending data from the special outlier fluctuation pattern table 222d corresponding to (whether it is a probability change or a time saving) A time-determined variation pattern is predicted (S1835).

Predicted success/failure, stop type, and variation pattern are stored in each storage area (corresponding to the newly stored suspension data) corresponding to the reservation area corresponding to the winning order of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k (S1836) ). It is determined whether the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k was stored by interrupting (changing the order of) the previously stored variable display start order (S1837). ). When it is determined that the variable display start order of the pending data newly stored in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k is interrupted (changed) in the previously stored variable display start order. (S1837: Yes), for the pending data after the change display start order of the newly stored pending data, predict and update the validity, stop type, and variation pattern again (S1838).

In this way, in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, based on each counter value indicated by the winning command output by the main control device 110, determination of success or failure, selection of the variation pattern, and determination of the rearrangement order (variation start order) are performed. Since each is performed, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, even when processing such as the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b and the selection of the variation pattern are concentrated, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can reliably execute the processing. can be done.

Also, since the winning command output from the main controller 110 only indicates each counter value, even if the command is intercepted by a hanging board or the like, it is difficult to determine whether the judgment is a big win. Yes, fraud can be suppressed.

In addition, since the data amount of the winning command output by the main controller 110 can be configured to be small, the burden of sending and receiving commands between the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 can be reduced. can reduce the time required for

Further, by backing up each counter value by the sound lamp control device 113, the main controller 110 does not need to output each counter value again even when the power is restored from a power failure. The start-up time at power-on can be shortened.

In addition, in this embodiment, each time it is suspended, it is determined whether there is a change in the order of the fluctuation start (the order was interrupted and stored), and the game state at the start of the fluctuation (high probability or low probability) is determined. ), but not limited to that, if there is a hit in the hold, the hold that is the hit among the holds that are established later is established first It may be configured not to stop the variation before the winning is reserved. By constructing in this way, the game state at the start of fluctuation is not changed by the order of start of fluctuation, and there is no need to redo the determination of success or failure in advance, and the control load in the game can be reduced.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 78. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the game balls are alternately distributed to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b by the distribution winning device 630 has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, when the game ball enters the distribution winning device 630 next, the game ball is directed to either the first start hole 63a or the second start hole 63b. A winning notification lamp 660 is provided to operate or notify in a sorting manner.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. The ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 630, it is notified to which of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b it will be distributed. do.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, the distribution winning device 630 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described. The distribution winning device 630 in the ninth embodiment has a winning notification lamp 660 added to the front side of the distribution winning device 630 in the first embodiment, which is visible to the player. This winning notification lamp 660 is a lamp for notifying to which of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b the game ball is distributed when it enters the distribution winning device 630. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), the award notification lamp 660 is composed of a left route award notification lamp 660a and a right route award notification lamp 660b. The left route winning notification lamp 660a is arranged at a position where the passive sorting member 640 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the receiving portion 640a can receive a game ball that has landed in the sorting prize winning device 630. (That is, in the state of inducing the game ball to the first starting port 63a), it is controlled to light up.

The right route winning notification lamp 660b is arranged at a position where the passive sorting member 640 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the receiving portion 640b can receive a game ball entered into the sorting prize winning device 630. When it is in a state (ie, a state in which the game ball is guided to the second starting port 63b), it is controlled to light up.

In the distribution winning device 630, a rotation angle sensor 670 for detecting the rotation of the passive distribution member 640 is provided on the rotation shaft portion of the passive distribution member 640, and when the passive distribution member 640 rotates, the rotation angle is detected. is configured to The rotation angle sensor 670 is set so that the position where the passive distribution member 640 rotates to the position where the magnet 640c provided on the passive distribution member 640 and the base side magnet 900a overlap becomes the origin (rotation angle of 0 degrees). ing. When the passive sorting member 640 rotates clockwise from the origin position (see FIG. 74(a)), the rotation angle becomes positive. It is set so that when it is rotated in the direction of a), the rotation angle becomes negative.

Here, the position where the passive sorting member 640 rotates to the position where the magnet 640c of the passive sorting member 640 and the base side magnet 900a overlap is the origin position of the rotation angle sensor 670, so that the magnet 640c and the base side magnet 900a Since the passive distribution member 640 does not stop at this origin position, it stops at a position rotated in either the left or right direction when viewed from the front, and the rotation angle sensor is positive. or a negative value. Therefore, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is at a position capable of guiding the game ball to the first starting port 63a. On the other hand, if the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a negative value, it can be determined that the passive distribution member 640 is at a position where the game ball can be guided to the second starting port 63b. Therefore, by controlling the lighting of the winning notification lamp 660 based on the determination result, the player is notified that when the game ball enters the sorting winning device 630 next time, the game ball will move between the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b. It is possible to determine in advance which one is to be distributed.

In addition, the position where the passive distribution member 640 stops is the position where the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 becomes negative or positive (that is, other than the origin). The route winning notification lamp 660b is turned on, and the player can always be notified of the winning route.

In this way, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 630, it can be determined in advance to which one of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b to be distributed. When the number of reserved balls corresponding to the opening 63a is the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second starting opening 63b is 3, which is one less than the upper limit number (3 in this embodiment). Next, when the game balls enter the distribution winning device 630 and are distributed to the first start port 63a, an overflow occurs and the game balls are wasted. If it is not known to which of the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b the game ball is to be distributed, a problem arises that the game ball cannot be shot at all times.

However, in the present embodiment, the winning notification lamp 660 allows the player to know in advance whether the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b will be allocated next. Only when the decision is made, the shooting of the game ball is stopped, and the game can be played efficiently.

Next, referring to FIG. 75, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A winning notification lamp 660 and rotation sensors 670 are added to the main controller 110 . The award notification lamp 660 is connected via an input/output port so that lighting is controlled based on a command from the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 . Further, the rotation angle sensor 670 is connected so that the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 can acquire the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 via an input/output port.

The timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76 . FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the ninth embodiment is the start winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) instead of the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) in contrast to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the first embodiment. is added.

Referring to FIG. 77, start winning process 4 (S160), which is one process of timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160). The starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment has a winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) added to the starting winning process (FIG. 24, S108) of the first embodiment. . The processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment are the same as the processes of S901 to S914 in the first embodiment.

Referring to FIG. 78, the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070), which is one process of the starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment, will be described. do. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070). In the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) of the ninth embodiment, when the next game ball enters the distribution winning device 630, it is distributed to either the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. This is a process for executing lighting control for informing whether or not the light is on.

In the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070), first, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value (that is, whether or not the game ball is guided to the first start opening) (S1071 ). When it is determined that the value of the rotation angle sensor 670 is a positive value (S1071: Yes), the lighting control of the left route winning notification lamp 660a is performed (S1072). On the other hand, when it is determined that the rotation angle sensor has a negative value (S1071: No), the lighting of the right route winning notification lamp 660b is controlled (S1073).

Thus, by determining the state of the passive distribution member 640 from the value of the rotation angle sensor 670, when the game ball next wins the distribution winning device 630, the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b It is possible to accurately discriminate to which side is distributed, and to inform the player of more accurate information.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to notify by a lamp, but it is not limited to that, it may be notified by voice or the like, or in the third pattern display device 81, it is configured to notify by characters, patterns, etc. You may By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player in a more comprehensible manner. In addition, if the third symbol display device 81 notifies with characters, symbols, etc., the player can confirm the prize winning route of the sorting prize winning device 630 while visually recognizing the variable display of the special symbols, which makes it easier to play the game. .

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment described above, the state of the passive distribution member of the distribution winning device 630 is determined by the rotation angle sensor 670, and the game ball is directed to either the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b. The case of determining whether or not to distribute has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 63a, the distribution winning device 630 guides the game ball to the second starting port 63b. When the game ball wins the second starting port 63b, the distribution winning device 630 determines that it is in a state of guiding the game ball to the first starting port 63a.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment in the following points. In the tenth embodiment, when a game ball wins in the distribution winning device 630 based on winning the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, either the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment in that it is determined whether or not the game is distributed to .

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment. Elements that are the same as in the ninth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 79, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the rotation sensor 670 is deleted from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the ninth embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 80, timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 of main control unit 110 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing this timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process of the tenth embodiment is the start winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170) instead of the starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) in contrast to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) of the ninth embodiment. ) has been added.

Referring to FIG. 81, start winning process 5 (S170), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 80) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the tenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170). The starting winning process 5 (FIG. 81, S170) of the tenth embodiment is different from the starting winning process 4 (FIG. 77, S160) of the ninth embodiment, except that the winning route notification process (FIG. 78, S1070) is deleted. Processing of S1080 and S1090 is added. The processes of S901 to S914 in the tenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S901 to S914 in the ninth embodiment.

When it is determined whether the game ball has won the first starting hole 63a (S901: Yes), lighting control for lighting the right route winning notification lamp is executed (S1080). Here, since the distribution winning device 630 is configured to alternately distribute the game balls to the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b, it is detected that the game ball has won the first start port 63a. In this case, it can be determined that the distribution winning device 630 is in a state of distributing the next entered game ball to the second starting port 63b. With this configuration, the state of the passive sorting member 640 can be predicted and determined without detecting the state of the passive sorting member 640, and there is no need to provide a sensor or the like for detection. configuration can be simplified. Similarly, when the game ball has won the second starting port 63b (S908: Yes), the lighting control for lighting the left route winning notification lamp is executed (S1090).

In this way, every time a game ball wins in the first starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b, the lighting display of the winning notification lamp 660 is switched. In the case, it is possible to confirm in advance which of the first start port 63a and the second start port 63b is in a state of being distributed, and when a game ball is entered, it does not become a reserved ball, A game can be played by judging whether it will overflow.

In this embodiment, the passive sorting member 640 is configured to rotate when it comes into contact with a game ball, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to be movable by a motor, solenoid, or the like.

In such a configuration, the passive distribution member 640 is movable (rotated) so as to alternately distribute to the first starting port 63a and the second starting port 63b. Further, when the passive distribution member 640 is moved by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, the state of the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined, and the first special symbol corresponding to the special symbol with the less reserved symbol is determined. The movement may be controlled so as to be distributed to the starting port 63a or the second starting port 63b. By constructing in this way, in one special symbol, the occurrence of overflow exceeding the upper limit number of reserved balls is suppressed, and the upper limit number of times is evenly applied to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. can be held until

Further, when the passive sorting member 640 is moved by a motor, a solenoid, or the like, when an error or dishonesty (abnormal winning, etc.) is detected in the game, the boundary wall between the housing portion 640a and the housing portion 640b of the passive sorting member 640 , so that the position on the center line between the vane 64a and the vane 64b of the normal electric accessory 64 (that is, the position where the magnet 640c and the base side magnet 900a overlap), and the game ball is moved to the first start opening It may be configured so as to prevent winning in 63a and second starting port 63b. By configuring in this way, when the pachinko machine 10 is tampered with, the lottery game can be controlled so as not to be performed, and the damage on the gaming parlor side can be reduced.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b) to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when a power failure occurs, the data in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the data in the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are backed up (backed up from the power supply 115). Data is held by supplying power. Then, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10, it is confirmed whether each data in the RAM 23 and the RAM 223 is destroyed. The case where the game is started after returning from the state immediately before has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on (Fig. 83). Based on each data in the storage area 203 u, a rearrangement return data command is generated and output to the sound lamp control device 113 . On the other hand, the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 compares the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command with the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the RAM 223, and if they match, it returns as it is to play the game. If it starts and does not match, the data in each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is updated to the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command, and the game is started.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the eleventh embodiment, each data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u and the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k, which are backed up when the power is turned on, are collated, and the process of whether or not they match is executed. It differs from the pachinko machine 10 in form.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

82(a) and 82(b) are diagrams schematically showing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing an example when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the pending symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of completion and then restored. In the upper display area Dm, characters "holding is being displayed in the order of establishment" are displayed, indicating that the reserved symbols are displayed in the order of establishment. This character is displayed until the game is restarted and a newly established reserved symbol display is displayed. Details will be described later, but when the pending symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of establishment and returns, the rearrangement pending storage area 203 u in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 This is when the data in the sub-rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the RAM 223 are compared and they do not match.

FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing an example when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 and the suspended symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of start of fluctuation and the game returns. In the upper display area Dm, characters "holding is being displayed in the order of start of fluctuation" are displayed, indicating that the reserved symbols are rearranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation. This character is displayed until the game is restarted and a newly established reserved symbol display is displayed. Details will be described later, but when the pending symbol display immediately before the power is turned off is displayed in the order of start of fluctuation and returns, the rearrangement pending storage area 203 u in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 This is when the data in the sub-rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the RAM 223 are collated and matched.

By configuring in this way, the game parlor side, maintenance and inspection contractor, etc. can confirm whether or not data inconsistency has occurred for some reason when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Also, since the normal display is displayed, the player does not know that some trouble has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and the player can be prevented from having anxiety or doubt.

In addition, since data collation is performed at the time of initial setting when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can be restored with more accurate reserved symbol display. Furthermore, if the data do not match, the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u are updated, so the data in the subordinate rearrangement pending storage area 223k should be matched when the data in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is started. It is possible to prevent the problem that an erroneous reserved design display is displayed at the time of return.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the notification is made by displaying characters in the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of return, but the notification is not limited to this, and may be a voice or the like, or a dedicated lamp or the like may be turned on. It may be configured to allow, or may be configured to display the reserved pattern display in a special display mode (for example, blinking or displaying in a special pattern) to notify when returning.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are connected to the backup power supply from the power supply 115 (power stored in the capacitor). ) is supplied even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, so that the contents of the RAM 203 and the RAM 223 are held for a certain period of time (one week in this embodiment) without being initialized.

With reference to FIG. 83, startup processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. The start-up process (FIG. 83) of the eleventh embodiment has the process of S1120 added to the start-up process (FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. The processes from S1101 to S1114 in the eleventh embodiment are the same as the processes from S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S1109 or S1112 is executed, the process of S1120 is executed. In the process of S1120, a rearrangement return data command is generated based on each data in each reserved area of the rearranged reservation storage area 203u and output to the sound lamp controller 113. FIG. This rearrangement return data command is generated for each reservation area, data indicating each reservation area (reservation areas 1 to 8) is attached, and each data of each reservation area (successful judgment result storage area 203u1, jackpot type storage Area 203u2, variation pattern type storage area 203u4, variation start time storage area 203u5, look-ahead probability variation flag 203u5).

Thus, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, before the normal game (main process (FIG. 33, S1200)) is executed, in the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed, the rearrangement pending storage area 203u is output to the sound lamp controller 113 as a rearrangement return data command, so that the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 are set in the initial setting when the power is turned on. Data can be collated with the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k, and the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the sound lamp controller 113 can match the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main controller 110. can be made

Here, for example, even if the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the sound lamp control device 113 stores correct data, the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main controller 110 may be erroneous or initialized. In the case where the power supply is restored, even if the reserved pattern display is displayed based on the data of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k, it may be an erroneous reserved pattern display. However, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main controller 110 and the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the sound lamp control device 113 are collated. problems can be prevented.

With reference to FIG. 84, startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. The start-up process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 84) is different from the start-up process of the first embodiment (FIG. 34) in that each process from S1320 to S1325 is added. The processes from S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment are the same as the processes from S1301 to S1311 in the first embodiment.

In the start-up process (84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S1131 is executed, the process of S1320 is executed. It is determined whether a reordering return data command has been received from main controller 110 (S1320). If it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has not been received (S1320: No), this process is repeatedly executed. That is, it is in a standby state until it receives the rearrangement return data command.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has been received (S1320: Yes), it is determined whether the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command match. (S1321). If it is determined that the data in the sub-reordering reservation storage area 223k and the data indicated by the reordering return data command match (S1321: Yes), all the reordering flags 223k7 of the reservation areas storing the data are turned on. (S1322). Characters of ``holding is being displayed in the order of start of fluctuation'' indicating that the reserved pattern display is rearranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation are displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the upper display region Dm of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1323).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data in the slave sorting reserve storage area 223k and the data indicated by the sorting return data command do not match (S1321: No), the sorting return data command output by main controller 110 is Based on the indicated data, the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is updated, and the rearrangement flags 223k7 of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k are all set to OFF (S1324). It is instructed to display the characters "holding is being displayed in the order of establishment" indicating that the pending symbol display is displayed in the order of establishment in the left display area Dm1 of the upper display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. A display command is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1325).

Note that the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 includes a wait time (S1102), so that S1311 of the start-up process (FIG. 84) of the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 start-up process (not shown) are completed, the main process (S1200) is executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, before the rearrangement return data command is output from the main control device 110, the audio ramp control device 113 In the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221, the process of S1320 is executed, and the output of the rearrangement return data command from the main controller 110 is waited.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the audio lamp control device 113 from failing to receive the rearrangement return data command. In the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, after executing the process of setting interrupt permission (S1311), the process of receiving the rearrangement return data command and performing collation is executed. Therefore, even if the main controller 110 starts the main process (Fig. 33, S1200) first and transmits a command, it should be performed after executing the process of collating the corresponding process. It is possible to prevent the problem that the control processing necessary for the normal game cannot be performed and the game freezes.

In this embodiment, when the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is initialized by operating the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) at power-on, the rearrangement return data command is This is a command indicating that there is no data in the replacement pending storage area 203u. This command may be substituted with a dedicated initial value setting command or the like.

In the present embodiment, when the collation matches, the reserved design display is displayed in the order of the start of fluctuation, and when it does not match, the reserved design display is displayed in the order of establishment, but it is particularly limited to this. However, if they match, they may be displayed in order of formation, and if they do not match, they may be displayed in order of start of fluctuation. In addition, the pending pattern display is displayed in the state (arrangement order) immediately before the power is turned off, and the third pattern display device 81, a dedicated lamp, etc., shows the collation results in patterns, characters, and the lighting mode of the lamp. It may be configured to notify. By constructing in this way, even if an instantaneous power failure or the like occurs, it is possible to more accurately return to the reserved symbol display state before the power failure, so that the game can be resumed with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off state), or if it is during time saving, the number of times of time saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return, and can perform determination such as rearrangement.

Next, a modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82(c) and 85. FIG. In the modified example of the eleventh embodiment, when the matching result does not match, as shown in FIG. 82(c), the pending symbol display is displayed as a temporary symbol.

FIG. 82(c) is a diagram showing an example of when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the suspended symbol display is displayed with temporary symbols and then restored in the modification of the eleventh embodiment. In the upper display area Dm, characters of "temporarily displaying pending" are displayed, indicating that the pending symbol display is displayed as a temporary symbol. The temporary reserved symbol display and the characters announcing it are established anew when the game is restarted, and based on each reserved area in the rearrangement reserved storage area 203u of the main control device 110, a prize winning command generated. is received and displayed until each reserved area in the secondary permutation reserved storage area 223k is updated. Although the details will be described later, when the pending symbol display is displayed as a temporary pending symbol display and returns, the rearrangement pending storage area 203 u in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 This is when the data in the sub-rearrangement reserved storage area 223k are collated and do not match.

With this configuration, when the data in the sub-reordering reservation storage area 223k of the sound lamp control device 113 and the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u of the main control device 110 do not match, a provisional reservation pattern display is displayed. As a result, the game parlor side or the contractor who performs maintenance and inspection of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 and the data do not match. In addition, by continuing to display the temporary reserved symbol display until a new winning command is received, it is possible to prevent an erroneous reserved symbol display from being displayed to the player.

In this embodiment, the temporary reserved design display is displayed, but not limited to that, the reserved design display areas Ds1 to 8 are not displayed in a special color or display mode (for example, yellow). or blinking display mode).

With reference to FIG. 85, startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing this startup process. The start-up process (FIG. 85) of the modification of the eleventh embodiment is different from the start-up process (FIG. 84) of the eleventh embodiment in that S1330-S1331 are added instead of S1324-S1325. ing. The processing from S1301 to S1323 in the modification of the eleventh embodiment is the same as the processing from S1301 to S1323 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the start-up process (FIG. 84) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the eleventh embodiment, in the process of S1321, the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k and the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command match. If it is determined not to do so (S1321: No), the data in each reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is cleared to 0 (initialized) (S1330). A display command ( A temporary pattern command) is generated and output (S1331).

In this way, when the collation of the data does not match, a temporary reserved pattern is displayed, and by delaying the display of the regular reserved pattern until a new winning command is received, a more correct reserved pattern is displayed. The display can be made known to the player.

In addition, since the regular reserved pattern display is restored at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b, the reserved pattern display is performed by the player starting the game. The player can recognize that the display has been resumed again, and the game can be played with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off state), or if it is during time saving, the number of times of time saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return, and can perform determination such as rearrangement.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, backup power is supplied from the power supply 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 so that data is backed up even when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. I explained the case where

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, backup power is not supplied from the power supply device 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, based on the rearrangement return data command from the main controller 110, the data in the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area 223k is updated to restore the reserve symbol display to the state immediately before the power was turned off.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the twelfth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 does not back up the data when the power is turned off. This differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment in that a process of restoring the reserved symbol display to the state immediately before the power is turned off is executed.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

Although not shown, in the twelfth embodiment, backup power from the power supply device 115 is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 .

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing this main process (S1400). The main processing (FIG. 86, S1400) of the twelfth embodiment is different from the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the eleventh embodiment in that S1417 to S1419 are omitted. The processing from S1401 to S1416 in the twelfth embodiment is the same as the processing from S1401 to S1416 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the twelfth embodiment, in the main process (FIG. 86), if it is determined that there is power-off occurrence information (S1415: Yes), wait until the pachinko machine 10 is powered off without executing any process. be in a state to

With reference to FIG. 87, startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 87 is a flow chart showing this startup process. The start-up process of the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 87) is different from the start-up process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 84) in that the processes of S1340-S1343 are added instead of the processes of S1320-S1325. The processes from S1301 to S1311 in the twelfth embodiment are the same as the processes from S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

When the processing of S1311 is executed, it is determined whether or not the rearrangement return data command output from main controller 110 has been received (S1340). If it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has not been received (S1340: No), processing to wait until the rearrangement return data command is received is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the rearrangement return data command has been received (S1340: Yes), the data in each reserved area of the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k is updated based on the data indicated by the rearrangement return data command. (S1341). The rearrangement flag 223k7 of each reservation area is set to OFF (S1342). A display control device 114 generates a display command for displaying the characters "holding is being displayed in the order of establishment" indicating that the pending pattern display is displayed in the order of establishment in the upper display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. (S1343).

In this way, even if the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is not supplied with backup power, the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u is transferred from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the power is turned on. A reordering return data command based on the data stored in is output. Therefore, even if backup power is not supplied to the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113, the reserved symbol display at the time of power failure can be restored and displayed when the power is turned on again. Therefore, the capacity of the backup power supply of the power supply device 115 can be reduced, and the size of the power supply device 115 provided in the pachinko machine 10 can be made compact.

Further, when the power is turned on again, regardless of the state at the time of power failure, the pending symbol display is displayed in the order of establishment, and furthermore, it is informed that it is displayed in the order of establishment, so the system can be restored. The order in which the reserved symbol displays are displayed can be easily determined.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off state), or if it is during time saving, the number of times of time saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return, and can perform determination such as rearrangement.

Next, a modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the modification of the twelfth embodiment, in the start-up process (FIG. 88) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, when the rearrangement return data command is received from the main control device 110, the secondary rearrangement reserve storage area 223k The data is updated, all the rearrangement flags 223k7 of the reserved areas in which the data are stored are set to ON, and the reserved pattern display after the return is configured to be displayed in the order of start of fluctuation.

With reference to FIG. 88, startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing this startup process. The start-up process of the modification of the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 88) is different from the start-up process of the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 87) in that each process of S1350-S1351 is added instead of each process of S1342-S1343. It is The processes from S1301 to S1341 in the modified example of the twelfth embodiment are the same as the processes from S1301 to S1341 in the twelfth embodiment.

In the start-up process (88) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S1341 is executed, in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k, the reservation area in which the data is stored All the rearrangement flags 223k7 are set to ON (S1350). Generate a display command for displaying characters "holding is being displayed in order of start of fluctuation" indicating that the reserved pattern display is rearranged and displayed in the order of start of fluctuation in the upper display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81. and output to the display control device 114 (S1351).

Thus, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko machine 10 from the power-off state and the reserved symbol display is restored, the reserved symbol display is displayed regardless of the order displayed immediately before the power is turned off. displayed in order. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the power has been turned off and the order has been forcibly rearranged.

In addition, since the reserved pattern display is automatically rearranged and displayed when the power is restored from the power interruption, it is recognized that the reserved pattern display rearranged and displayed was established before the power interruption. Therefore, even if the power supply is cut off during the normal game, the game can be restarted without worry.

In this embodiment, when receiving a rearrangement return data command from the main controller 110, the audio lamp control device 113 sets all the rearrangement flags 223k7 to ON, and in the main processing executed thereafter, The reserved symbol display is rearranged and displayed in order of start of fluctuation. However, not limited to this, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a rearrangement return data command from the main controller 110, the value indicated by the variable order storage area 203u4 of the rearrangement pending storage area 203u indicated by the rearrangement return data command Based on this, it may be configured to generate and output a display command for rearranging and displaying the pending symbol display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the control addition for rearranging the reserved symbol display at the time of start-up processing. Therefore, if a rearrangement return data command output from the main controller 110 is received, the pending symbol display can be rearranged and displayed. In this case, all the sorting flags 223k7 may be set to ON, and the reserved symbol display may be arranged in a sorted state even after the start-up process. The rearrangement pending symbol display may be configured such that the display is maintained in a rearranged state until the symbol display is completed.

In the present embodiment, in the start-up process executed by the main controller 110, the game state immediately before the main controller 110 is powered off state), or if it is during time saving, the number of times of time saving (the value of the time saving counter 203k)) is also output as a command. As a result, the sound lamp control device 110 can also determine the game state at the time of return, and can perform determination such as rearrangement.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 90. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment described above, in the start-up process (FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, based on the data in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u that is backed up, the sound lamp control device 113, a rearrangement return data command is output, and the data indicated by the output rearrangement return data command is collated with the data in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k, and the power supply for the display of the reservation symbol is turned off. The case of returning to the previous state has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, backup power is supplied from the power supply 115 to the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. In such a configuration, in the start-up process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the backup sub-reordering pending data command is not received from the main controller 110, and the sub-rearrangement pending data command is received. Based on the data in the storage area 223k, the suspended symbol display is displayed and returned.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in the following points. In the thirteenth embodiment, the main controller 110 does not output the rearrangement return data command to the audio ramp controller 113, but is backed up in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the audio ramp controller 113. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment in that the process of restoring the reserved symbol display is executed based on the data.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

It should be noted that the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of this embodiment, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, is supplied with backup power when power is cut off when power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and the voice ramp control device 113 Each data stored in the RAM 223 is held.

With reference to FIG. 89, startup processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing this startup process. The start-up process of the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 89) is different from the start-up process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 83) in that the process of S1120 is deleted. The processing from S1101 to S1114 in the thirteenth embodiment is the same as the processing from S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment. That is, the same processing as the start-up processing (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment is executed.

With reference to FIG. 90, startup processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. The start-up process of the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 90) is different from the start-up process of the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 84) in that the process of S1360 is added instead of the processes of S1320 to S1325. The processes from S1301 to S1311 in the thirteenth embodiment are the same as the processes from S1301 to S1311 in the eleventh embodiment.

In the start-up process (FIG. 90) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the thirteenth embodiment, when the process of S1310 is executed, based on the data stored in the secondary rearrangement pending storage area 223k, A display command for displaying the reserved symbol display on the display control device 114 is generated and output to the display control device 114 (S1360).

Here, the displayed reserved symbol display is displayed based on the data of each reserved area stored in the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area 223k immediately before the power is turned off. Since even the state of the rearrangement flag 223k7 of each reserved area is stored, the reserved pattern display is displayed in the order displayed immediately before the power was turned off.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing to be performed when the power of the main controller 110 is turned on, and it is possible to shorten the start-up time (the time until the normal game is executed) when the power is turned on.

In addition, the reserved symbol display can be restored in the state immediately before the power is turned off, and the player can restart the game without worrying even after the power is turned on again.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, there is a high probability that the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be selected when a big hit such as super reach occurs at the timing when the fluctuation can start. When a variation pattern is selected, a notification mode for notifying the player is displayed so as to look at the display area on the side where the variation pattern is displayed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the 14th embodiment, when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a big win such as super reach is selected, the player is notified to pay attention to the display area displayed with the variation pattern. It is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in this respect.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c), display modes displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 91(a) is a diagram schematically showing that the background image of the right display area Dm2 is displayed blinking when a variation pattern such as Super Reach is selected in the right display area Dm2.

FIG. 91(b) shows that when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the right display area Dm2, the second special symbol displayed in the right display area Dm2 (in this embodiment, the reach state is reached). FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing that the size of the symbol on the screen) is displayed with a symbol larger than the normal size.

FIG. 91(c) shows, when a variation pattern such as Super Reach is selected in the right display area Dm2, the player is notified to look at the right display area Dm2 in the left display area Dm1 "Look right!! ] is a diagram schematically showing that characters are displayed.

With this configuration, the player can watch the display area on the side where the background image is displayed blinking and play the game, thereby displaying a variation pattern that is easily selected when a big win such as super ready-to-win is achieved. It is possible to play a game while preventing the variation mode to be overlooked.

In addition, the player can easily understand which display area to look at and does not need to always pay attention to both display areas while playing the game. Therefore, even if the game is played for a long time, the fatigue of the player can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured to notify the special symbol to be noticed by the notification as described above. The size of the display area Dm2 may be varied. Specifically, when it is desired to draw attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol, the size of the left side display area Dm1 is enlarged toward the right side of the display area Dm2, and the size of the right side display area Dm2 is reduced. Alternatively, the upper display area Dm may be entirely changed to the left display area Dm1 for display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the variation mode of the special symbol that the player wants to pay attention to. Further, the player can play the game expecting that the left side display area Dm1 or the right side display area Dm2 will not be greatly changed, and can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early.

Next, referring to FIG. 92, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram schematically showing part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. A first delay time storage area 203v5 and a second delay time storage area 203v6 are added to the other memory area 203v.

In the first delay time storage area 203v5, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the second special symbol, the same time as the selected variation time delays the start of variation of the first special symbol. This is a storage area that is stored as delay time.

The first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described in detail later, but in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the selected variation pattern is a big hit. If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not match or the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern that is out of range, the delay time that is the same as the variation time of the selected variation pattern is stored.

Further, when the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated each time the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed. . Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval at which the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is executed, is subtracted.

In the second delay time storage area 203v6, when a variation pattern such as super reach is selected in the first special symbol, the same time as the selected variation time delays the start of variation in the second special symbol. This is a storage area that is stored as delay time.

The second delay time storage area 203v6 will be described in detail later, but in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the selected variation pattern is a big hit. If the variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not match or the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern that is out of range, the delay time that is the same as the variation time of the selected variation pattern is stored.

Further, when the delay time is stored in the second delay time storage area 203v6, the time is updated each time the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) is executed. . Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14), is subtracted.

Thus, in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when the variation pattern of the big hit or the variation pattern of super reach is selected, the start of variation of the other special symbol, which is the start of variation after that, is delayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol and the second special symbol from being variably displayed at the same time, with a high probability of being selected in the event of a big win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a complicated game state in which the player needs to pay attention to both the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm2.

In the present embodiment, the first delay time storage area 203v5 and the second delay time storage area 203v6 are configured to store delay times, but are not limited to this and may be configured to store count values and the like. may With this configuration, the number of times the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed is counted by subtracting 1 from the count value each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) is executed. Naturally, it may be configured to measure time.

Referring to FIG. 93, in the fourteenth embodiment, in one process of special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110, A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203). The first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 16, S203) with respect to the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the fourteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 94, in the fourteenth embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 93, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 5 (S350) will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S350). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Further, when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern for a big hit or a variation pattern for super reach to be lost, a delay time is set for delaying the start of variation of the second special symbol, and the first special This is a process for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player to see the pattern variation mode.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 94, S350), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, the variation that becomes a big hit (S571). When it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S571: No), the first delay time is updated by subtracting 2 ms (S584). On the other hand, if it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S571: Yes), it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot. (S572). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S572: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S573). When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S572: No), a special deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S575). When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S576).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, a variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. generated (S577).

For the variation pattern selected in the process of S577, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern or an unsuccessful super reach (S578). If it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that will result in a big win or a super reach variation pattern that will result in a loss (S578: Yes), the same variation time as the selected variation pattern will be the delay time. is set in the second delay time storage 203v5 (S579). A first warning notice command is set to instruct the sound lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the left side display area Dm1 where the first special symbol is displayed (S580).

A second mute command is set to mute the sound effect or voice that varies the second special symbol (the sound effect or voice that is set to the variation pattern that varies the second special symbol) (S581). A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S582). The measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S583).

In this way, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern that becomes a big hit or the super reach that becomes a loss is selected, the notification mode is set so as to pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to pay attention to, and can play the game easily.

In addition, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a super reach that is out is selected, it is related to the variation of the second special symbol so as to focus on the variation mode of the first special symbol. Sound effects and voices are muted. Therefore, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner which special symbol should be paid attention to. In addition, it becomes easier to hear the voice and sound effects of the first special symbol, and the game can be enjoyed more.

In addition, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, if a variation pattern that results in a big hit or a super reach that results in a loss is selected, the start of variation of the second special symbol is delayed, so that the left display area Dm1 and the right display are displayed at the same time. With the area Dm2, it is possible to prevent the notable variation mode from being displayed, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, by displaying the variation modes in which the player expects a big win at different times (they are not displayed at the same time), the game can be played for a longer time while maintaining the expectation of the big win. , it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, by starting measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol along with the setting of the variation pattern command, it is possible to measure the variation time in synchronization with the timing of the start of variation of the first special symbol, and to accurately measure the variation time. can be measured.

In order to make the player pay attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol, as the notification mode to be notified, the size of the first special symbol may be made large (see FIG. 91(b)). In addition, in order to draw attention to the first special symbol, the right display area Dm2 may be configured to display a character "Look to the left!" 91(c)). Also, the above contents may naturally be combined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode of the first special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a super reach that is out is selected, the second special symbol is focused on the variation mode of the first special symbol. The sound effects and voices related to the variation of the pattern are silenced. However, not limited to this, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two speakers, one of which is configured to output the voice and sound effects related to the first special symbol, and the other to output the voice and sound effects related to the second special symbol. etc., and in the variation mode of the first special symbol, when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a super reach that becomes a loss is selected, a voice, sound effect, etc. related to the second special symbol is output. It may be configured to draw attention to the variation mode of the first special symbol by configuring the speaker to be non-operating or to have a low output. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily switch voices, sound effects, etc. (switching which voice, sound effect, etc. is to be output between the first special symbol and the second special symbol).

95, in the fourteenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, A certain second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206). The second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 95, S203) of the fourteenth embodiment is the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing for the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 20, S206) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 22, S710), a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is added. The processes of S701 to S709 in the fourteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 95, S750) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 96, in the fourteenth embodiment, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 95, S206) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 5 (S750) will be described. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S750). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol. In addition, when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a variation pattern of super reach that results in a loss, a delay time is set for delaying the start of variation of the first special symbol, and a second special This is a process for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player to see the pattern variation mode.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (FIG. 96, S750), first, whether the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v6 (that is, in the variation mode of the first special symbol, the variation that becomes a big hit (S751). If it is determined that the delay time is set in the second delay time storage area 203v6 (S751: No), the second delay time is updated by subtracting 2 ms (S764). On the other hand, if it is determined that the second delay time is not set (S751: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the success/failure determination in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a jackpot. (S752). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON. When it is determined that the second big hit flag 203p is set to ON (S752: Yes), a special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S753). In this embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol is set to the second special symbol. ing. When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S752: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S755). When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S756).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, a variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the second variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. generated (S757).

For the variation pattern selected in the process of S757, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern or an off super reach (S758). If it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that results in a big hit or a super reach variation pattern that results in a loss (S758: Yes), the same variation time as the selected variation pattern is the delay time is set in the first delay time storage 203v5 (S759). A second warning notice command is set to instruct the sound lamp control device 113 to blink the background image of the right side display area Dm2 where the second special symbol is displayed (S760).

A first mute command is set to mute the sound effect or voice that varies the first special symbol (sound effect or voice that is set to the variation pattern in which the first special symbol is varied) (S761). A second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S762). The measurement start of the second variation time, which is the variation time of the second special symbol, is set (S763).

In this way, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that becomes a big hit or the super reach that results in a loss is selected, the notification mode is set so as to pay attention to the variation mode of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation pattern. Therefore, the player can determine which display area to pay attention to, and can play the game easily.

In addition, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, when a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a super reach that is out is selected, it is related to the variation of the first special symbol so as to focus on the variation mode of the second special symbol. Sound effects and voices are muted. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand which special symbol should be paid attention to. In addition, it becomes easier to hear the sound of the second special symbol and sound effects, and the game can be enjoyed more.

In addition, in the variation mode of the second special symbol, if a variation pattern that results in a big hit or a super reach that results in a loss is selected, the start of variation of the first special symbol is delayed, so that the left display area Dm1 and the side display are displayed at the same time. With the area Dm2, it is possible to prevent the notable variation mode from being displayed, and to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In addition, by displaying the variation modes in which the player expects a big win at different times, the player can play the game while maintaining the expectation of the big win for a longer period of time, which leads to early boredom of the game. You can prevent it from getting lost.

In addition, by starting measurement of the variation time of the second special symbol along with the setting of the variation pattern command, it is possible to measure the variation time in synchronization with the timing of the start of variation of the second special symbol, and to accurately measure the variation time. can be measured.

In order to make the player pay attention to the variation mode of the second special symbol, as the notification mode to be notified, the size of the second special symbol may be configured to be large (see FIG. 91(b)). In addition, in order to draw attention to the second special symbol, the left display area Dm1 may be configured to display characters "Look to the right!" 91(c)). Also, the above contents may naturally be combined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode of the first special symbol.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, there is a high probability that the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be selected when a big hit such as super reach occurs at the timing when the fluctuation can start. When a variation pattern is selected, the sound lamp control device 113 executes a process of displaying a notification mode for notifying the player so as to look at the display area on the side where the variation pattern is displayed.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the fifteenth embodiment, a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a jackpot such as super reach is selected, and when a command indicating the variation pattern command is output to the audio ramp control device 113, voice The lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that it notifies the player to pay attention to the display area displayed in the variation pattern.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 97, the variable display setting process (S1411), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 35, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifteenth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1411). In the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) of the fifteenth embodiment, S1630 and S1640 are added to the variable display setting process (FIG. 38, S1411) of the first embodiment. The processing from S1601 to S1614 in the fifteenth embodiment is the same as the processing from S1601 to S1614 in the first embodiment.

In the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fifteenth embodiment, when the process of S1603 is executed, the first warning notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is executed. be. Details of the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) will be described later. In the case of ready-to-win, for the variation mode of the first special symbol, to set a command to execute notification for making the player pay attention, and a command to mute the voice and sound effect related to the variation mode of the second special symbol. is the processing of

In the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630), first, the first variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit, or it is determined whether it is a super reach that is out. (S1631). If it is determined that the received first variation pattern command is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or is a super reach out (S1631: Yes), the background of the left side display area Dm1 that displays the first special symbol A first warning notice command is generated and output to the display control device 114 to instruct the display control device 114 to blink the image (see FIG. 91(a)) (S1632).

A second mute command for muting the voice and sound effects relating to the variation mode of the second special symbol is generated and output (S1633). On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first variation pattern command is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or is not a super reach (S1631: No), this process is terminated.

Returning to the variable display setting process (FIG. 97, S1411) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the description continues. When the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1411) is executed, the processes from S1604 to S1608 are executed. When the process of S1608 is executed, the process of the second warning notice process (S1640) is executed. As for the second caution notice process (S1640), the first caution notice process (FIG. 98, S1630) is performed by changing the first caution notice command to the second caution notice command, the second mute command to the first mute command, Only the respective changes are made, and the other parts are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the type of the variation pattern output from the main controller 110 is discriminated, and when the variation pattern that the player expects to be a big win or the super reach that is not a big win, the variation mode is played in the game. Since the notification mode is set so as to attract the player's attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation mode. Therefore, the player can discriminate which special pattern variation mode should be paid attention to, and can play the game easily. Therefore, fatigue of the player can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the first caution command or the second caution command, the background image of the display area on the side where the special symbol is displayed is displayed blinking. The width may be increased (see FIG. 91(b)). In addition, in the notification mode of notifying that the attention is paid to the second special symbol, for example, so that the attention is paid to the special symbol on the side of attracting attention, the character " Look to the right!!” may be displayed (see FIG. 91(c)). Also, the above contents may naturally be combined. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the fluctuation mode of the special symbol which is highly likely to be selected when the jackpot is achieved.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, the case where the variation pattern is selected and the variation is started at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be started has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th embodiment, in the selection of the variation pattern in the first special symbol, the variation pattern that becomes a big hit or the super reach of the deviation (that is, the probability that it will be selected when it becomes a big win When the variation pattern) is selected, it is determined whether or not the same variation pattern is selected in the second special symbol, and if it is selected, the variation pattern selected in the first special symbol is used. delay the start of fluctuation.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the 16th embodiment, when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected in the event of a big win is selected from the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is started to vary. , is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that the process of delaying until the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the display mode displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 shows, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 99, in the second special symbol (left display area Dm2), in a state in which the deviation pattern of the super reach is selected and displayed, the first special symbol ( Also in the right display area Dm1), the super reach to be out is selected, the start of fluctuation in the first special symbol is delayed, and the second special symbol (left display area Dm2) is notified in a notification mode. A certain character "Look to the right!!" is displayed. Then, when the super ready-to-win fluctuation pattern displayed with the second special symbol ends, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 99, the delayed super ready-to-win fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner. It is a diagram schematically showing the.

Thus, in the first special design and the second special design, when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected in the case of a big hit (for example, super reach) is selected, the variation pattern in the first special design Since the start of the variation of is delayed, the player can concentrate on the variation mode of one special symbol and play the game calmly.

In addition, since the variation pattern with great expectation for the big win is continuously started and the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to fluctuate in order, the player can play the game for a long time with the expectation of the big win. It is possible to do so, and it is possible to prevent early boredom with the game.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is provided with a first delay time storage area 203v5. In the first delay time storage area 203v5, in the first special design and the second special design, when a variation pattern with a high probability of being selected when a jackpot such as super reach is selected, the second special design is selected. The same time as the time until the fluctuation pattern being selected or variably displayed ends is a storage area stored as a delay time for delaying the start of the variability of the first special symbol.

The first delay time storage area 203v5 will be described in detail later, but in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the selected variation pattern is a big hit. It is a variation pattern or a variation pattern of super reach that is out, and if the variation pattern is selected in the same way in the second special symbol, the variation pattern selected in the second special symbol is the end of the variation. The same delay time is stored as the time until the

Further, when the delay time is stored in the first delay time storage area 203v5, the time is updated each time the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed. . Specifically, 2 ms, which is the interval at which the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) is executed, is subtracted.

Referring to FIG. 100, in the sixteenth embodiment, in one process of special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 100, S203) of the sixteenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing for the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is added. The processes of S301 to S309 in the sixteenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 101, in the sixteenth embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 100, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 6 (S360) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (S360). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. In addition, when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a variation pattern of super reach that becomes a loss, it is determined whether or not a similar variation pattern is selected in the second special symbol, and is selected. If so, a delay time is set for delaying the start of variation of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and processing for setting a notification mode or the like for notifying the player to pay attention to the second special symbol. is.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 6 (FIG. 101, S360), first, whether the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (that is, the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol , whether a variation pattern that will result in a big hit or a variation pattern of super reach that is not selected) is discriminated (S621). When it is determined that the delay time is set in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S621: No), the first delay time is updated by subtracting 2 ms (S635). On the other hand, if it is determined that the first delay time is not set (S621: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the success/failure determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot. (S622). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first big hit flag 203o is set to ON (S622: Yes), the special hit variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S623). When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S622: No), a special deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S625). When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S626).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, a variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. generated (S627).

For the variation pattern selected in the process of S627, it is determined whether the selected variation pattern is a big hit variation pattern or an off super reach (S628). When it is determined that the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern that becomes a big hit or a variation pattern of Super Reach that becomes a loss (S628: Yes), in the second special symbol, the variation pattern that becomes a big hit or It is determined whether an outlier super reach is being selected or fluctuated (S629).

In the second special symbol, when it is determined that the variation pattern that becomes a big hit or the super reach that is out is being selected or varied (S629: Yes), the variation that becomes a big hit during selection or variation in the second special symbol The time until the super reach of the pattern or the deviation ends is stored as the delay time in the first delay time storage area 203v5 (S630).

The voice lamp control device 113 displays the characters "Look to the right!!" for notifying to pay attention to the second special pattern (right display region Dm2) in the left display region Dm1 where the first special pattern is displayed. A second warning notice command for instructing is set (S631). On the other hand, in the second special symbol, when it is determined that the variation pattern that becomes a big hit or the super reach that is not selected or is not being varied (S629: No), the process of S632 is executed. A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S632). Measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S633).

In this way, in the variation mode of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the variation pattern of the big win or the variation pattern of the super ready-to-win is selected, the variation of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is started. is delayed until the variation pattern variably displayed in the second special symbol finishes variably, so that the variation pattern that gives the player a great sense of expectation for the big win is variably displayed in both display areas at the same time. You can prevent it from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate on the display of the variation pattern of one special symbol with a sense of anticipation for the big win, and to play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. Also, by displaying in both display areas, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the variation of one of the special symbols.

In addition, in the second special symbol, while the variation pattern is being displayed, a notification mode is displayed to notify the player to pay attention to the second special symbol, so that the player can easily discriminate the special symbol to which attention should be paid. The game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the second special symbol, when the variation pattern that gives the expectation of the big win is completed, next, the delayed variation pattern of the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the player can continuously win the big win. It is possible to enjoy a variation mode with great expectations for the game, and to prevent early boredom with the game.

In the present embodiment, as a notification mode for notifying the user to pay attention to the second special symbol, the character is used for notification, but the background image of the left side display area Dm2 may be blinked or displayed in a special color. good. Also, the second special symbol may be displayed in a larger size. Also, it is of course possible to configure so as to notify by combining them.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the start of the variation of the first special symbol is delayed, but not limited to this, the time until the variation of the second special symbol ends is added to the variation time of the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Then, the first special symbol is not displayed in the right display area Dm1 until the variation of the second special symbol is completed, or the variation display of the second special symbol is completed. , the selected variation pattern (such as super reach) may be displayed. By configuring in this way, there is no need to change the timing of the fluctuation start, and the control load can be suppressed compared to the case of delaying.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol is delayed, but the second special symbol may be delayed, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be selected later. It may be configured to delay the one that starts the fluctuation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 116. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the result of the determination of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined is notified by the display mode in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth embodiment, when the game ball enters the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b and becomes a reserved ball, before the start of fluctuation is possible, When the result of success/failure determination is a big win, the player is informed in advance that the result of the success/failure determination will be a big win or is decided by a lottery due to the change due to the suspension.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the following points. In the seventeenth embodiment, before the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started to fluctuate, it is notified that it is a big hit in a state where the reserved symbol is displayed as a reserved ball (hereinafter referred to as a one-shot announcement) ) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Other configurations and other processing performed by the MPU201 of the main control device 110, various processing performed by the MPU211 of the payout control device 111, various processing performed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display control device Various processes executed by the MPU 231 of 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the display mode displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in this embodiment will be described. In FIG. 102(a), in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 among the reserved symbol displays of the second special symbol is usually "●". Schematic representation of the display mode in which the player is notified in advance that the special reserved symbol display "▲" is displayed and the special symbol display mode indicating the big win is stopped and displayed. is a diagram shown in FIG.

Also, in FIG. 102(b), in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, among the reserved symbol displays of the first special symbol, the reserved symbol display displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds4 is usually " A display mode in which the player is notified in advance that the special reserved symbol display "△" is displayed instead of the symbol "○" and the special symbol display mode indicating the big win will be stop-displayed. It is a figure shown typically.

By configuring in this way, the player can recognize the winning/failure judgment result in advance by the reserved symbol display, and every time the reserved symbol display is displayed, the special reserved symbol display for notifying the big win is displayed. Therefore, you can have expectations and be more interested in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the jackpot was notified in advance (one-shot notification) by the reserved design display, but it is not limited to that, it may be notified by voice, or may be configured to be notified by a dedicated lamp or the like. Alternatively, the third pattern display device 81 may of course be configured to notify with characters, patterns, or the like.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram schematically showing part of the other memory area 203v of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. A first notification flag 203v7, a second notification flag 203v8, and a notification timer storage area 203v9 are added to the other memory area 203v.

The first notification flag 203v7 is a flag indicating that a reserved symbol display (“Δ” in this embodiment) for informing a big hit is being displayed in the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol. Although the details will be described later, the first notification flag 203v7 indicates that a special reserved symbol display for notifying a big win is displayed in the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. , is set to ON based on an instruction to the audio lamp controller 113 . Also, although not shown, the first notification flag 203v7 is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started based on the reserved symbol display for notifying that a jackpot will be won. Note that this flag is set to OFF at the time of initial setting.

The second notification flag 203v8 is a flag indicating that a special reserved symbol display (“▴” in the present embodiment) for notifying a big hit is displayed in the second special reserved symbol display. Although the details will be described later, the second notification flag 203v8 indicates that a special reserved symbol display for notifying a big win is displayed in the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. , is set to ON based on an instruction to the audio lamp controller 113 . Although not shown, the second notification flag 203v8 is set to OFF when a jackpot game is started based on the special reserved symbol display for notifying that a jackpot will be won. Note that this flag is set to OFF at the time of initial setting.

In the notification timer storage area 203v9, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed by the reserved symbol display (one-shot announcement) for notifying the big hit, the reserved symbol display is performed after being displayed. It is a storage area in which the time until the fluctuation of the special design based on is stopped is stored. When a one-shot announcement is made with one special symbol, when a winning variation pattern is selected with the other special symbol, than the set time stored in this notification timer storage area 203v9 A long variation time is chosen. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a big win prior to the big win by the one-shot announced reserved symbol display, and to prevent the players from being confused.

Also, after the one-shot announcement, a special symbol different from the one-shot announced special symbol (for example, when the one-shot announcement is made with the reserved symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol, the second Special symbol) is established, the variation stops before the one-shot announced reserved symbol display, and when a big win occurs, the game state may be changed. Specifically, it was predicted that the fluctuation would start in a high probability game state, and it was determined in advance that it would be a big hit, and a one-shot announcement was made. When the variation starts first and the normal 15R jackpot is stopped and displayed, after that, the game is changed to the normal probability (low probability) game state, and the success/failure judgment result corresponding to the reserved symbol display announced at once. There is a problem that it will be out instead of a big hit.

However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, when the one-shot announcement is made, the variation pattern is selected so as not to generate a big winning game, so the above-described problems can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a notification that confuses the player.

FIG. 104 is a diagram schematically showing the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. As shown in FIG. In the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k in the seventeenth embodiment, a reservation notification flag 223k8 is added to the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k in the first embodiment.

The reservation notification flag 223k8 is provided for each reservation area, and when the first notification command or the second notification command is received from the main controller 110, the reservation notification flag 223k8 of the reservation area indicated by the command is turned on. set. Further, the pending notification flag 223k8 resets each data in the pending area to the initial value ( 0 clear) to set it to OFF.

Next, referring to FIG. 105, the first prefetch update process (S926), which is one process of the first prefetch process (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing this first prefetch update process (S926). In the first prefetch update process (FIG. 105, S926) in the seventeenth embodiment, the first announcement lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) and A first extended change look-ahead process (FIG. 107, S1160) is added. The processes from S931 to S939 in the seventeenth embodiment are the same as the processes from S931 to S939 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S931, when it is determined that the predicted result of the win/loss determination is a big hit (S931: Yes), the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) is executed. The first announcement lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150) will be described later, but when the one-shot announcement has not been executed, a lottery process is executed to determine whether to execute the one-shot announcement.

In the first notification lottery process (FIG. 106, S1150), first, it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1151). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1151: No), in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u, the one that comes first in the change order and wins is stored. It is determined whether or not it is set (S1152).

If it is determined in the rearrangement reserve storage area 203u that there is a prize that comes first in the order of variation (S1152: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the items with the highest variation order are out of order in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u (S1152: No), the notification count value is acquired (S1153). The notification count value is a value obtained by acquiring the value of the special per type counter C2. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special hit type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value.

It is determined whether the obtained notification count value is a win count value (any one of 0 to 30 in this embodiment) (S1154). When it is determined that the obtained notification count value is a hit (S1154: Yes), the reserved symbol display of the first special symbol that has made this determination is held for the audio lamp control device 113 to notify the jackpot. A first notification command is generated to instruct to display by design display (one shot notification) (S1155). This first notification command is a command indicating which reserved area's reserved pattern display is a command.

The time until the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display ends is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1156). The first notification flag 203v7 is set to ON (S1157). On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired notification count value is out of range (S1154: No), this process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is ON (S1151: Yes), 2 ms is subtracted from the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 to update the notification timer. is performed (S1158).

In this way, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is ON, no lottery is performed to determine whether the one-shot notification is performed. Players can be prevented from being confused by performing the one-shot announcement a plurality of times without performing the next one-shot announcement until the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, by performing a lottery as to whether or not to perform a one-shot announcement, it is possible to prevent the one-shot announcement from being performed even if the reserved pattern display that becomes a big hit every time is performed, and if the one-shot announcement is not performed, the expectation of a big hit can be prevented from being held by the player.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation ends is stored as the notification timer, but the counter value or the like may be stored, and the counter value may be updated each time it is updated.

Referring to FIG. 105, the description will be continued by returning to the processing of the first prefetch update processing (FIG. 105, S926). When the process of S934 or S935 is executed, the first extended change look-ahead process (FIG. 107, S1160) is executed.

In the first extended fluctuation look-ahead process (FIG. 107, S1160), first, it is determined whether or not the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1161). When it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1161: Yes), the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON, and is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u. The value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 when the second special symbol corresponding to the reservation area starts to change is calculated (predicted) for the data of the reservation area, and the selected variation pattern (variation time ) is discriminated (predicted) (S1162). On the other hand, if it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is set to OFF (S1161: No), this process is terminated.

By configuring in this way, in the reserved symbol display corresponding to the first special symbol, one-shot notification is performed, and even when the variable display of the second special symbol is extended and displayed, the variation pattern (variation Time) can be determined (predicted) in advance, so that the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the correct order of start of variation. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct variation start order, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the second look-ahead update process (S946), which is one process of the second look-ahead process (FIG. 27, S914) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing this second prefetch update process (S946). In the second prefetch update process (FIG. 108, S946) in the seventeenth embodiment, the second announcement lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) and the second prefetch update process (FIG. 28, S946) in the first embodiment A second extended variation look-ahead process (FIG. 108, S1180) is added. The processing from S951 to S959 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as the processing from S951 to S959 in the first embodiment.

In the process of S951, when it is determined that the predicted win/loss determination result is a big win (S951: Yes), the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) is executed. The second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170) will be described later, but when the one-shot announcement has not been executed, a lottery process is executed to determine whether to execute the one-shot announcement.

In the second notification lottery process (FIG. 109, S1170), first, it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1171). If it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S1171: No), the sorting reserve storage area 203u stores the one that comes first and wins. It is determined whether or not it is set (S1172).

If it is determined in the rearrangement pending storage area 203u that there is a win that comes first in the order of variation (S1172: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the items with the highest change order are out of order in the rearrangement reservation storage area 203u (S1172: No), the notification count value is acquired (S1173). The notification count value is a value obtained by acquiring the value of the special per type counter C2. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special hit type counter C2 is used as a counter for generating the notification count value.

It is determined whether the acquired notification count value is a win count value (any one of 0 to 30 in this embodiment) (S1174). When it is determined that the obtained notification count value is a hit (S1174: Yes), the special notification of the jackpot is displayed with respect to the sound lamp control device 113 by displaying the second special symbol that has been determined. A second notification command is generated to instruct to display in the reserved design display (one-shot notification) (S1175). This second notification command is a command indicating which reserved pattern display of which reserved area the command is for.

The time until the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol display ends is calculated and stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 (S1176). The second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S1177). On the other hand, if it is determined that the obtained notification count value is out of range (S1174: No), this process ends. Further, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is ON (S1171: Yes), timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14 ) is decremented by 2 ms, which is the execution period, and the notification timer is updated (S1178).

In this way, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 or the second notification flag 203v8 is ON, no lottery is performed to determine whether the one-shot notification is performed. Players can be prevented from being confused by performing the one-shot announcement a plurality of times without performing the next one-shot announcement until the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, by performing a lottery as to whether or not to perform a one-shot announcement, it is possible to prevent the one-shot announcement from being performed even if the reserved pattern display that results in a big win every time is performed, and if the one-shot announcement is not performed, the jackpot will not be reached. It is possible to prevent the problem that the player loses expectations.

In the present embodiment, the time until the fluctuation ends is stored as the notification timer, but the counter value or the like may be stored, and the counter value may be updated each time it is updated.

Referring to FIG. 108, return to the second prefetch update process (FIG. 108, S946) to continue the description. When the process of S954 or S955 is executed, the second extended change look-ahead process (S1180) is executed. The second extended fluctuation look-ahead process (S1180) is the same as the first extended fluctuation look-ahead process (FIG. 107, S1160) except that the second notification flag 203v8 is changed to the first notification flag 203v7. Therefore, illustration and detailed description are omitted.

By configuring in this way, in the reserved design display corresponding to the second special design, one-shot notification is performed, and even when the variable display of the first special design is extended (delayed), in advance By discriminating the fluctuation time, the reserved symbol display can be rearranged in the correct fluctuation start order. Therefore, the player can be notified of the correct variation start order, and the player can be prevented from being confused.

Referring to FIG. 110, in the seventeenth embodiment, in one process of special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 A certain first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing this first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203). The first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 110, S203) of the seventeenth embodiment is the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing for the first special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 16, S203) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 18, S310), a first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is added. The processing of S301 to S309 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as the processing of S301 to S309 in the first embodiment. When the process of S309 is completed, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 111, in the seventeenth embodiment, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 110, S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 7 (S370) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S370). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Also, in the second special design, when the one-shot notification is performed, the variation pattern of the special design corresponding to the one-shot announced reserved design display is longer than the time until the variation ends. set.

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 111, S370), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 17, S309) is a jackpot (S651). . Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON. When it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S651: Yes), it is determined whether the second notification flag 203v8 is set to ON (S652). When it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is on (S652: Yes), the variation pattern with a longer variation time than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is the first alternative variation pattern, and the first alternative variation pattern It is set as a command (S653).

Here, as the selection of the variation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, based on the game state at that time from the normal time special per variation pattern table 202d or the time saving / probability variation special per variation pattern table 202d, Of the variation patterns with variation times longer than the value in the notification timer storage area 203v9, the variation pattern with the closest variation time is selected. For example, in the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), if the jackpot type is the 15R jackpot and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the variation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot B is selected.

In addition, if the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than all the variation patterns in the variation pattern table, the value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is used as the variation time. An alternative variation pattern is set. In this alternative variation pattern, all the main symbols in the special symbols are variably displayed during the variation time, and then stopped in a display mode indicating a big win. In addition, even when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, instead of the normal 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern, an alternative variation pattern in which a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is used as the variation time. selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second notification flag 203v8 is off (S652: No), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S654). In this embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol is set to the second special symbol. ing. When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S655).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first jackpot flag 203o is off (S651: No), a special loss variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S656). When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. The variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c (S657).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, a variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. generated (S658).

A first stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S659). The measurement start of the first variation time, which is the variation time of the first special symbol, is set (S660).

112, in the seventeenth embodiment, in one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 15, S107) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 A certain second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing this second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206). The second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 112, S206) of the seventeenth embodiment is the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing for the second special symbol variation start processing (FIG. 20, S26) of the first embodiment. In place of (FIG. 22, S710), a second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is added. The processing of S701 to S709 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as the processing of S701 to S709 in the first embodiment. When the process of S709 is completed, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is executed.

Referring to FIG. 113, in the seventeenth embodiment, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 112, S206) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 7 (S770) will be described. FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S770). The second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770) is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol. In addition, in the first special pattern, when the one-shot notification is performed, a variation time is set until the variation mode of the special symbol corresponding to the one-shot notified reserved symbol display finishes varying.

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (FIG. 113, S770), first, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 21, S709) is a jackpot (S771). . Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined by whether or not the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON. When it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is set to ON (S771: Yes), it is determined whether the first notification flag 203v7 is set to ON (S772). When it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is on (S772: Yes), the variation pattern with a longer variation time than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is used as the second alternative variation pattern. A command is set (S773).

Here, as the selection of the variation pattern command longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9, based on the game state at that time from the normal time special per variation pattern table 202d or the time saving / probability variation special per variation pattern table 202d, A variation pattern with a variation time that is longer than the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 and that is closest to the value is selected. For example, in the normal gaming state (low-probability gaming state), if the jackpot type is the 15R jackpot and the value stored in the notification timer storage area 203v9 is 40 seconds, the variation pattern of the super reach 15R jackpot B is selected.

In addition, when the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is longer than any variation pattern in the variation pattern table, an alternative variation pattern is set in which the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 plus 5 seconds is used as the variation time. be. After all the main symbols in the special symbols are variably displayed during the variation time, this alternative variation pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big win. In addition, even when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, instead of the normal 2R probability variation dedicated variation pattern, an alternative variation pattern in which a value obtained by adding 5 seconds to the value of the notification timer storage area 203v9 is used as the variation time. selected.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first notification flag 203v7 is off (S772: No), the special winning variation pattern table 202d corresponding to the game state is set (S774). In this embodiment, although not shown, a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the first special symbol is set to the first special symbol, and a variation pattern table 202d dedicated to the second special symbol is set to the second special symbol. ing. When the game state is a normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special winning variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 10(a)) is set. Also, if the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), time saving/probability special per variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(a)) is set. The jackpot type table 202b is set based on the value of the special hit type counter C2, and the jackpot type is determined (S775).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second jackpot flag 203p is off (S771: No), a special deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the game state is set (S776). When the game state is the normal game state (low-probability game state and not during time saving), the normal special deviation fluctuation pattern table 202e (FIG. 10(b)) is set. In addition, when the game state is a high probability game state or during time saving (time saving counter 203k is greater than 0), the time saving/probability variable special off-variation pattern table 202d (FIG. 11(b)) is set. Based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reservation execution area 203c, the variation pattern type is selected (determined) from the selected variation pattern table (S777).

Based on the value of the variation pattern determination counter C3, a variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the second variation pattern command for notifying the selected variation pattern to the voice lamp control device 113 is issued. generated (S778). A second stop type command is set based on the determined stop type (S779). The measurement start of the second variation time, which is the variation time of the second special symbol, is set (S780).

Thus, when the one-shot announcement is executed in the reserved design display corresponding to the second special design, the one-shot announcement is executed in the reserved design display corresponding to the first special design of the first special design. In this case, the variation mode of the second special symbol in which the result of the judgment result is a big hit is delayed until the special symbol corresponding to the one-shot announced special reserved symbol display stops fluctuating, so the one-shot announced. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a big win prior to the big win game based on the special reserved symbol display.

Therefore, assuming that a lottery is drawn in a high-probability game state, even if a one-shot announcement is made, a big win will not occur earlier than that, so that the game state cannot be changed and a one-shot announcement will not occur. It is possible to prevent the trouble that the lottery game based on the display of the reserved pattern which has been performed does not become a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an alternative variation pattern is selected to delay the occurrence of a big hit, but it is of course possible to delay the start of variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent another big win from occurring prior to the big win triggered by the reserved symbol display in which the one-shot announcement was made.

Further, in the present embodiment, all jackpots are delayed, but only the 15R normal jackpot may be delayed. By constructing in this way, the 15R probability variable jackpot and the 2R probability variable jackpot occur before the jackpot based on the reserved symbol display with the one-shot announcement, but the game state is changed from high probability to low probability. This can be prevented, and the lottery game based on the reserved pattern display for which the one-shot announcement is made can be a big hit. In addition, even before the big win based on the one-shot announced reserved pattern display, the big win is generated to provide the player with many big win games and increase the player's expectation for the big win.

The main process (S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing this main process (FIG. 114, S1400). The main processing (FIG. 114, S1400) of the seventeenth embodiment differs from the main processing (FIG. 35, S1400) of the first embodiment by command determination processing (FIG. 36, S1414) and pending number display update processing (FIG. 37). , S1406), command determination processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) and pending number display update processing 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) are added. The processing of S1401 to S1413 in the seventeenth embodiment is the same as the processing of S1401 to S1413 in the first embodiment. When the processing of S1413 is completed, command determination processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is executed.

Command determination processing 4 (S1560), which is one processing of the main processing (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing this command determination process 4 (S1560). Command determination processing 4 (FIG. 115, S1560) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the command received from the main control device 110. is the processing of

In the command determination process 4 (FIG. 115, S1470) of the seventeenth embodiment, S1561 and S1562 are added to the command determination process (FIG. 36, S1414) of the first embodiment. The processes of S1501 to S1518 in the seventeenth embodiment are the same as the processes of S1501 to S1518 in the first embodiment. When it is determined that the first or second special symbol variation restart command has not been received in the process of S1517 (S1517: No), the process of S1561 is executed.

In the process of S1561, it is determined whether the first notification command or the second notification command output by main controller 110 has been received (S1561). When it is determined that the first notification command or the second notification command has been received (S1561: Yes), the reservation notification flag 223k8 in the reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k indicated by the received notification command is set to ON. (S1562).

With reference to FIG. 116, pending number display update process 4 (S1550), which is one process of the main process (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 in the seventeenth embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing this pending number display update process 4 (S1550). In the pending number display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), the pending symbol display with the rearrangement flag 223k7 set to ON is in the order of fluctuation start, and the pending symbol display set to OFF is in the order of formation. Further, the reserved design display corresponding to the reserved area where the reserved notification flag 223k8 is set to ON is displayed as a special reserved design display (in this embodiment, if it is the first special design, "△", the second special design If it is, it is a process for displaying with "▲").

In the reservation number display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550), first, the variable display start time of the variable start time storage area 223k5 of each reservation area of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area 223k is updated (S1551). The execution cycle of this process (1 ms in this embodiment) is subtracted from each time data stored in the fluctuation start time storage area 223k5. Further, the updating of the variable display start time is not limited to this, and may be performed by providing an RTC or the like, or may of course be performed by other methods.

The reserved pattern display of the reserved areas in which the sorting flag 223k7 is set to ON is displayed in the order of starting fluctuation, and the reserved patterns are displayed in the order in which the reservation is established for the reserved areas in which the sorting flag 223k7 is OFF. is set (S1552).

By controlling in this way, when the rearrangement is executed (when the frame switch 22 is operated), the displayed reserved design display (reserved area where the rearrangement flag 223k7 is set to ON) Only with respect to it, the reserved design display can be rearranged and displayed in order of start of fluctuation.

It is determined whether or not there is a reserved area for which the reserved notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553). If it is determined that there is a reserved area in which the reserved notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: Yes), the reserved design display in which the reserved notification flag 223k8 is set to ON is changed to a special reserved design display (this implementation In the form, a reserved display command for display is generated to display "Δ" for the first special symbol and "▴" for the second special symbol (S1554). A voice command for outputting a voice indicating that the one-shot announcement has been made (in the present embodiment, a voice saying “big win!!”) is generated (S1555). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no reserved area for which the reserved notification flag 223k8 is set to ON (S1553: No), this process ends.

In this way, when the pending notification flag 223k8 is set to ON, the pending symbol display is set to be displayed as a special pending symbol display that notifies that a big win has been achieved. Each time the symbol display is displayed, the player can play the game with expectation that the special reserved symbol display will be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, when the special reserved symbol display is displayed, the fact that the game is a jackpot is also reported by voice, so that the gambling spirit of the player can be further heightened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game more quickly.

Further, the reserved design display is updated and displayed each time the reserved design display update process 4 (FIG. 116, S1550) is executed. The display can also be moved and displayed, the reserved symbol display can be displayed accurately to the player, and the confusion of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the voice for notifying that the one-shot notification has been made is configured to be repeatedly notified while the hold notification flag 223k8 is set to ON, but not limited to this, only once It is good also as a structure output.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by displaying the reserved design display in the special reserved design display, it was configured to notify the one-shot announcement, but not limited to that, the background in different colors and display modes (for example, blinking display) It may be notified by displaying, or may be configured to be notified by displaying characters on the third pattern display device 81 .

In this embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S907) and the second look-ahead processing (FIG. 27, S914), and the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning It is configured to output various commands such as a command, a first notification command, a second notification command, and the like. However, the main controller 110 is not limited to that, the command indicating various count values (special per random number counter C1, etc.) acquired based on the game ball entering the first start port 63a or the second start port 63b In the main processing (FIG. 114, S1400) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113, the first look-ahead processing (FIG. 25, S907) executed by the main controller 110 and the first 2 prefetch processing (FIG. 27, S914) or the like may be executed. With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing of the game (detection of winning of various winning ports, etc.) can be performed without missing anything. This configuration can be similarly applied to the first to sixteenth embodiments described above, and can reduce the control load of main controller 110 .

In addition, you may combine the structure from 1st Embodiment to 17th Embodiment suitably.

In addition to the slot machine and game machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown below.

A success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination of a first lottery game based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/failure determination of a second lottery game based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition, and the success/failure determination thereof. First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of right/failure determination in the order in which the second right/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a win, and the display control means displays the information on the first or second display means. a bonus game executing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, wherein Based on the establishment of the condition, determine a dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the established propriety judgment condition, and based on the establishment of the second propriety judgment means, determine the established propriety judgment condition Dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode related to time information of corresponding second identification information; Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information is started, the order in which the success/failure determination conditions including the first success/failure determination conditions and the second success/failure determination conditions established and the dynamic display mode determination means are determined. reserved information storage means for storing reserved information having at least information on the determined dynamic display mode, and reserved information of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the retained information storage means. a holding display means for displaying, for each piece of holding information, the order of establishment of the right/wrong judgment conditions combining the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition in an identifiable holding display mode; Alternatively, when the second propriety determination condition is satisfied and new pending information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the previously stored pending Based on the dynamic display mode for each piece of information, time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new pending information is dynamically displayed is determined and stored in the pending information storage means. dynamic display start time information determination means, and based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the pending information storage means by the dynamic display start time information determination means when a predetermined condition is established; and rearrangement means for rearranging the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means in the order of starting the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are satisfied. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. performed by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. When the first or second yes/no determination condition is met, the first or second yes/no determination condition that has been met and the first Suspended information having at least information on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and the order in which the success/failure determination conditions are established in combination with the 2 success/failure determination conditions is stored in the pending information storage means. While discriminating the reserved information of the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition stored in the reserved information storage means, the right/wrong of combining the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition for each reserved information The order in which the determination conditions are established is displayed by the pending display means as a display in a discernible pending display mode. When the first or second propriety determination condition is satisfied and new pending information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the previously stored Dynamic display start time information determining means determines time information until dynamic display of first or second identification information corresponding to new pending information starts, based on the dynamic display mode for each piece of pending information and stored in the hold information storage means. Then, when a predetermined condition is established, the suspension displayed on the suspension display means based on each dynamic display start time information stored in the suspension information storage means by the dynamic display start time determination means The display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement means in the order in which dynamic display is started. As a result, for example, while the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored, the hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display time of the first identification information during dynamic display is longer than the remaining dynamic display time of the second identification information during dynamic display, the second lottery game is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of is earlier than the start time of the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier. get faster. However, since the reserved display mode is displayed in order in the reserved display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions including the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the first lottery stored first is displayed in order. The suspension display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the game suspension information. As a result, the order in which the actual dynamic display is started may differ from the order in which the success/failure determination conditions are established. They are sorted and displayed in starting order. Therefore, even if the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual success/failure determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to perform dynamic display in the order in which dynamic display is started. Since the reserved display modes are rearranged, confusion of the player can be suppressed.

A gaming machine A2 comprising a condition allocating means for assisting alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition in the gaming machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sorting means assists the alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition. As a result, the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are likely to be established evenly, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game are efficiently executed, so that many games can be played in a short time. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the rearrangement means rearranges the pending information when the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means when the first or second success/failure determination condition is newly established. Based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each piece of pending information previously stored in the storage means, the first or second corresponding to the newly established pending information and the previously stored pending information. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a dynamic display start order of identification information is determined, and the order is stored in the hold information storage means in association with hold information.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first or second propriety determination condition is newly established and the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means, the dynamic data corresponding to each pending information previously stored in the pending information storing means Based on the display start time information, the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information and the previously stored hold information is determined, and the order is determined for each hold. The information is stored in the pending information storage means by the sorting means in association with the information. As a result, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the first or second propriety determination condition is newly established and the pending information is stored. Therefore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending display modes can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even when the dynamic display start order is changed, it is possible to rearrange the reserved display modes in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and the player can be notified of the correct dynamic display start order. can be done.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3 has an operation means operable by a player, and the rearrangement means satisfies the predetermined condition when the operation means is operated. , a gaming machine A4 characterized by rearranging the holding display modes.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the game player has operation means that can be operated, and the rearrangement means rearranges the reserved display modes on the assumption that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated. A gaming machine A4 characterized by:

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the player operates the operation means, the reserved display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement means assuming that the predetermined condition is established. As a result, rearrangement can be performed in the reserved display mode at the timing intended by the player, and the correct dynamic display start order can be notified to the player at the timing when the player wants to know the correct dynamic display start order. can be done.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the rearrangement means, when the first or second success/failure determination condition is newly established, displays the pending display as the predetermined condition being established. A gaming machine A5 characterized in that it rearranges the pending display modes displayed on the means.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first or second propriety determination condition is newly established, the holding display mode displayed on the holding display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means assuming that the predetermined condition is established. Thus, when a new reserved display mode is displayed, the reserved display modes are rearranged, so that the player can know the correct dynamic display start order.

In the game machine A1 or A5, a special game state is established in which the winning judgment between the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game is more likely to win than usual. Lottery information for selecting whether or not to shift is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second success/failure determination condition, and when the first or second success/failure determination condition is established, the established determination condition When storing the hold information corresponding to the hold information, it has a game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information, and the success/fail determination means is the hold information storage means Based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means until the first or second identification information corresponding to each piece of pending information stored in the , the game state lottery means judges whether the game state of the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each piece of reservation information is the special game state, executes a preliminary judgment for judging whether or not it is successful in advance, and the result is the aforementioned When it is possible to start dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each piece of on-hold information stored in the on-hold information storage means while storing in the on-hold information storage means in association with each on-hold information , based on the game state when it becomes possible to start the variation, the dynamic display mode determination means formally executes the determination of whether the change is possible. Until the corresponding first or second identification information can be dynamically displayed, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the judgment result of the preliminary judgment stored in the reserved information storage means by the propriety judgment means. , when the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means becomes capable of starting dynamic display, based on the judgment result of the propriety judging means executed in that case A gaming machine B1 characterized in that it determines a dynamic display mode.

According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the privilege game executing means draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state in which the success or failure judgment between the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the privilege game is executed is more likely to win than usual. lottery information is acquired by the game state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success/fail determination condition. Further, when the first or second success/failure determination condition is established and the hold information corresponding to the established judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the game state lottery means in association with the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Based on the dynamic display start time determined by the dynamic display start time determining means until the first or second identification information corresponding to each piece of pending information stored in the pending information storage means becomes capable of starting dynamic display Then, the game state lottery means judges whether or not the game state at the start of the dynamic display corresponding to each piece of reservation information is the special game state, and the win-or-fail judgment is executed by the win-or-fail judgment means. Then, the results are stored in the reservation storage means by the validity determination means in association with each reservation information. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to each piece of pending information stored in the pending information storage means becomes capable of starting dynamic display, the success/failure determination is made based on the game state in that case. duly carried out by means. Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can be started, based on the determination result of the prior determination by the right/fail determination means stored in the pending information storing means to determine the dynamic presentation time. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means becomes capable of starting dynamic display, based on the determination result of the propriety determination means executed in that case A dynamic presentation time is determined by a dynamic presentation time determining means. As a result, even if the pending information is newly stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the game state at the start of the dynamic display is judged based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the win/loss judgment is performed. . Therefore, it is possible to determine the dynamic display time in advance based on the correct result of the success/failure determination, and to determine the correct dynamic display start order even when a new success/failure determination condition is satisfied next time.

A success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination of a first lottery game based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/failure determination of a second lottery game based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition, and the success/failure determination thereof. First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of right/failure determination in the order in which the second right/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a win, and the display control means displays the information on the first or second display means. a bonus game executing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, wherein condition distribution means for assisting alternate establishment of the condition and the second success/failure determination condition; and a reservation storage means for storing the right to play the first or second lottery game until the first or second lottery game.

According to the gaming machine C1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are established. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Alternating establishment of the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition is assisted by the condition sorting means. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established with the assistance of the condition distribution means, the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the reservation storage means. As a result, the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are likely to be established evenly, the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be equally stored, and the first lottery game is performed. It is possible to prevent one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being prejudicially stored up to the upper limit number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that one of the rights to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game is stored up to the upper limit, but one of the rights exceeds the upper limit and becomes invalid. can.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine C1, a game area, a first start opening that satisfies the first success/failure determination condition by entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a game flowing down the game area and a second starting port that satisfies the second propriety determination condition when a ball enters the game ball, and the condition sorting means is configured so that the game ball enters the first starting port and the second starting port. The game machine C2 is characterized by having a game ball guidance part for assisting alternate ball entry.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start hole, the first win-or-fail judgment condition is established, and when the game ball enters the second start hole, the second win-fail judgment condition is established. be. The alternate entry of game balls into the first start hole and the second start hole is assisted by the game ball guide part of the condition distribution means. As a result, the player makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first start hole and the second start hole alternately by letting the game ball flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Since the execution of and can be performed efficiently, many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

In the game machine of the gaming machine C2, the rearrangement means, when the first or second success/failure determination condition is newly established and the hold information is stored in the hold information storage means, the hold information storage means The first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established pending information and the previously stored pending information based on the dynamic display start time corresponding to each pending information previously stored in A gaming machine C3 characterized in that a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is stored in the hold information storage means in association with hold information.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball received from the entrance ball opening of the condition sorting means is rotated in the first direction up to a predetermined angle, and the game ball is guided to the first starting opening via the first guide path by the game ball guide section. After being guided, it receives a game ball that enters from the ball inlet while being rotated by a predetermined angle in a first direction, and rotates by a predetermined angle in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction. The game ball is guided by the game ball guide portion to the second starting port through the second guide path. As a result, it is possible to distribute and guide the game balls alternately to the first start port and the second start port by using a common member, and the member to be distributed to the first start port and the second start port respectively. The structure for distributing game balls can be compactly configured as compared with the case of providing .

In the game machine C3, the game ball guiding portion of the condition sorting means is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance while being rotated in the first direction up to a predetermined angle. a first passive part that receives the entered game ball and rotates up to a predetermined angle in the second direction; A second passive part arranged at a position facing the game ball and rotating up to a predetermined angle upon receiving the entered game ball, and the first passive part receives the entered game ball from the ball entrance. After rotating in the second direction by the second passive part, before the next game ball enters the ball entrance, the second passive part prevents the ball from rotating in the first direction. After receiving a game ball entered from the opening and rotating in the first direction, before the game ball next enters the ball entrance, rotation regulation is prevented from rotating in the second direction. A gaming machine C4 characterized by having:

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition allocating means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. Then, when the first passive part receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the second direction up to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition allocating means is rotated to the predetermined angle in the second direction. When the second passive part receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the first direction up to a predetermined angle. After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it can rotate in the first direction before the next game ball enters the ball entrance. Alternatively, after the second passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the first direction, it rotates in the second direction before the game ball next enters the ball entrance. is prevented by the rotation restricting portion. As a result, after the game ball guiding part rotates and guides the game ball to one guide path, it rotates in the other direction before the next game ball enters, and the ball enters next. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being guided to the same guide path as the game ball entering before the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately alternately guide the game balls entering the ball entrance to the first start hole and the second start hole, and evenly distribute the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game. can be stored in

The game machine of the game machine C1 has a game area, and a common start opening that satisfies the first or second success/failure determination condition when a game ball flowing down the game area enters the game area, A game characterized in that the condition distribution means alternately establishes the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition each time a game ball enters the common start hole. Machine C5.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, each time a game ball flowing down the game area enters the common starting hole, the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are alternately distributed by the condition distributing means in a controlled manner. As a result, the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be alternately played at the common starting port, and the game area can be compactly configured.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5 and B1, the first or second right/wrong determination condition is newly established after execution of rearrangement display of the holding display mode by the holding display means by the rearrangement means. In this case, while maintaining the display order of the rearranged and displayed reserved display modes, the reserved display modes showing the newly established first or second right/fail judgment conditions are displayed in the order in which they were established. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that it is displayed on display means.

According to the game machine D1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5 and B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first or second adequacy determination condition is satisfied after the sorting means executes the sorted display of the reserved display modes by the reserved display means, the display order of the reserved display modes rearranged and displayed is maintained. In this state, the pending display modes indicating the newly established first or second right/wrong judgment conditions are displayed on the pending display means in the order in which they were established. As a result, even when the first or second adequacy determination condition is established after execution of the rearranged display and the corresponding reserved display mode is displayed, the display order of the rearranged and displayed reserved display modes is maintained. Therefore, the player can accurately recognize the order of starting the dynamic display at the time of rearrangement. Therefore, the player can distinguish between the reserved display mode in which the rearrangement is performed and the display mode in which the rearrangement is not performed, based on whether the timing of display in the reserved display mode is before or after the rearrangement is performed. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize which order the reserved display mode indicates.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine D1, the sorting is performed in a state in which the sorting-displayed pending display mode and the sorting-unexecuted pending display mode are mixedly displayed on the pending display means. When a predetermined condition triggering the execution of the means is newly established, the rearranging means rearranges all the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means in order of starting dynamic display. A game machine D2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in a state in which the pending display mode of the sort display and the pending display mode of the unexecuted sort display are mixed and displayed on the pending display means, the predetermined condition that triggers the execution of the sort means is newly set. If true, all pending display modes displayed on the pending display means are rearranged by the rearranging means in the order in which dynamic display is started. As a result, even if the pending display modes after sorting and before sorting are mixed, by executing sorting again, the correct order to start the dynamic display can be sorted. It can be identified by the pending display mode after execution of the replacement.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the holding information storage means allows the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means based on the satisfaction of the first or second success/failure determination condition. a normal reserved storage area for storing normal reserved information having at least correctness determination information used in the dynamic display mode determination means and dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means; Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the stored normal reserved information can be displayed dynamically, the result of the correctness decision by the correctness decision means and the dynamic display mode determination are made in advance based on the normal reserved information. a rearrangement pending storage area in which the dynamic display mode by means and the dynamic display start time information by said dynamic display start time information determination means are determined and stored as rearrangement information; 2 When the suitability determination condition is newly established, based on the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting reserve storage area, the newly established normal reserve storage area is stored. determining the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the stored normal hold information and the normal hold information previously stored in the normal hold storage area is started; , and a rearrangement order determining means for storing the order in the rearrangement reservation storage area.

According to the game machine E1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second right/wrong determination condition, the normal hold information having at least the right/wrong judgment information used for the right/wrong judgment and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode is stored in the hold information storage. stored in the instrument's normally reserved storage area. Before the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal reservation information stored in the normal reservation storage area can be dynamically displayed, based on the normal reservation information, the result of right or wrong determination and the dynamic display mode are displayed in advance. The dynamic display start time information is determined and stored as rearrangement information in the rearrangement pending storage area of the pending information storage means. When the first or second propriety determination condition is newly met, the dynamic display start time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting hold storage area is newly met and normally held. determining the order in which dynamic display of first or second identification information corresponding to each of the normal reservation information stored in the storage area and the normal reservation information previously stored in the normal reservation storage area is started; The order is stored by the sorting order determination means in the sorting reservation storage area. As a result, the data for executing the lottery game and the data for determining the order of sorting can be processed separately, and the process of determining the order of sorting can be facilitated. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the processing for executing the rearrangement, etc., and there is an effect that the development of the game machine can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 has main control means for executing main control of the game and subordinate control means for executing the game control according to a subordinate control signal output by the main control means, and the main control means The means has the pending information storage means, the sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storing means, and the sorting order is determined by the sorting order determination means based on the sorting information. Each time determination is made, a prize winning signal indicating each rearrangement order stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area is output to the slave control means, and the slave control means, based on the prize winning signal, determines the winning signal indicated by the prize winning signal. subordinate pending information storage means having a subordinate sorting pending storage area for storing each sorting order; and the rearrangement means for executing the game machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the game control is executed by the sub-control means according to the sub-control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. The rearrangement information is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area of the main control means, and the rearrangement information is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area each time the rearrangement order is determined by the rearrangement order determination means based on the rearrangement information. A winning signal indicating each rearrangement order is output to the slave control means by the main control means. Further, in the subordinate control means, each sorting order indicated by the prize winning signal is stored in the subordinate sorting pending storage area of the subordinate pending information storing means. Then, the rearrangement means of the slave control means rearranges the reserved display modes based on the rearrangement order stored in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area. As a result, the main control means does not need to rearrange the pending display modes even if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the gaming machine E1 has main control means for executing main control of the game and subordinate control means for executing the game control according to a subordinate control signal output by the main control means, and the main control means The means has the pending information storage means, and indicates each sorting information stored in the sorting pending storage area each time the sorting information is stored in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storing means. Outputting a prize winning signal to the slave control means, the slave control means having a slave rearrangement reservation storage area for storing each sorting information indicated by the prize winning signal based on the prize winning signal. said rearrangement order determination means for determining a rearrangement order based on the dynamic display start time in each piece of rearrangement information in said secondary rearrangement reservation storage area and storing it in said secondary rearrangement reservation storage area; and the rearrangement means for rearranging the reserved display modes based on the rearrangement order stored in the secondary rearrangement reserved storage area.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. Namely, the game control is executed by the sub-control means according to the sub-control signal from the main control means for executing the main control of the game. Each time the rearrangement information is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area of the main control means, the main control means outputs a winning signal indicating each piece of rearrangement information stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area to the slave control means. Further, in the slave control means, each sorting information indicated by the prize winning signal is stored in the slave sorting pending storage area of the slave pending information storing means. Then, the rearrangement order is determined based on the dynamic display start time in the rearrangement information stored in the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area, and the rearrangement order determination means of the secondary control means of the secondary rearrangement reservation storage area remembered. Based on the stored sorting order, the sorting means of the slave control means sorts the pending display modes. Thereby, the main control means does not need to determine the rearrangement order, and the slave control means can determine the rearrangement order based on the winning signal, so that the control load of the main control means can be reduced. . Therefore, the rearrangement of the pending display modes can be executed while suppressing the control load of the main control means.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, and E1 to E3, the holding information storage means performs the win-or-fail judgment based on the satisfaction of the first or second win-or-fail judgment condition. a normal reserved storage area for storing right/wrong determination information used for right/wrong determination by the means and dynamic display determination information used for determination of the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means; Before dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each information becomes possible, based on the respective information, the result of the validity determination by the validity determination means and the motion by the dynamic display mode determination means are determined in advance. a rearrangement pending storage area in which the dynamic display mode and the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means are stored as rearrangement information; When a predetermined condition is established, for each pending display mode displayed at that time, sorting effective information is stored in the sorting pending storage area, and each sorting information in the sorting pending storage area is stored. The game machine F1 is characterized in that rearrangement of the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is executed based on the above.

According to the game machine F1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, and E1 to E3, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second right/wrong determination condition, the right/wrong determination information used for right/wrong determination and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode are stored in the normal reserved storage area of the reserved information storage means. stored in Before the first or second identification information corresponding to each information stored in the normal reserved storage area can be dynamically displayed, based on each information, the result of right/fail judgment, dynamic display mode and dynamic display are performed in advance. Target display start time information is determined and stored as rearrangement information in the rearrangement pending storage area of the pending information storage means. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the sorting effective information is stored by the sorting means in the sorting pending storage area for each pending display mode displayed at that time, and each of the sorting pending storage areas is stored. Based on the sorting information, the sorting of the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately rearrange the pending display modes displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the order of starting the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine F1, the rearranging means repeatedly updates and displays the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means at each predetermined update opportunity, and the pending display mode is displayed on the pending display means. As for the display mode display, the reserved display modes in the sorting reserved storage area in which the sorting valid information is stored are sorted and displayed in the order in which the dynamic display is started, while the sorting valid information is stored. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the reserved display modes of the rearrangement reserved storage areas that have not been sorted are displayed in the order in which the first or second success/failure determination conditions are met.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is repeatedly updated and displayed by the rearranging means at every predetermined update opportunity. The pending display modes of the sorting pending display area in which the sorting valid information is stored are sorted in the order of starting dynamic display and displayed by the sorting means. On the other hand, the pending display mode in which the sorting validity information is not stored is displayed by the sorting means in the order in which the first or second propriety determination condition is met. Therefore, the rearranged pending display modes can be displayed while maintaining the order in which they are rearranged accurately in the order in which the dynamic display is started. Therefore, it is possible to separately display the sorted and unsorted pending display modes. The player can easily recognize the order in which the display is started.

A first lottery game and a second lottery to be executed after the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game in any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2. Based on the establishment of the first or second success determination condition, lottery information for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which the success/failure determination with a game is more likely to win than in normal times is acquired, and A game of storing the lottery information in the reservation information storage means in association with the reservation information when one or the second success/failure determination condition is satisfied and the reservation information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is stored. The state lottery means is provided, and the success/failure determination means selects the dynamic display start time information when the first or second success/failure determination condition is newly established and the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means. A game when dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information can be started based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the determining means. The game state lottery means judges whether the state is the special game state, executes a preliminary judgment for judging success or failure in advance, stores the result in the holding information storage means, and the result of the success or failure judgment is If it is a hit to shift to the special game state and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored reservation information is started is earlier than the previously stored reservation information, the newly stored It is determined whether the game state when dynamic display is started is the special game state for the reserved information that is in the order after the order in which the dynamic display is started corresponding to the reserved information that has been received. The game state lottery means makes the respective judgments, executes pre-determinations for making win/fail determinations in advance, and stores the results in the pending information storage means, and the dynamic display mode determination means Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can be started, each time new pending information is stored in the pending information storing means, the validity is determined. Based on the determination result of the preliminary determination stored in the pending information storage means, the determining means predetermines each of the dynamic display modes and stores them in the pending information storing means. When the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the stored pending information can be started, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the judgment result of the propriety judging means executed in that case. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it

According to the game machine G1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, the following effects are obtained. In other words, the privilege game executing means draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state in which the success or failure judgment between the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the privilege game is executed is more likely to win than usual. lottery information is drawn by the game state lottery means on the basis of the establishment of the first or second success/fail determination condition. In addition, when the first or second success/failure determination condition is met and hold information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is stored, the lottery result is held by the game state lottery means in association with the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. When the first or second propriety determination condition is newly established and the pending information is stored in the pending information storage means, based on the dynamic display start time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means, The game state lottery means determines whether the game state is a special game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored hold information can start dynamic display, Prior judgment for judging whether or not it is appropriate is executed by the propriety judging means, and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Then, if the result is a hit to shift to a special game state, and the order in which the dynamic display corresponding to the newly stored hold information is started is earlier than the hold information stored first, then The game state lottery means respectively judge whether the game state at the time of starting the dynamic display is the special game state again with respect to the reservation information in the order of , and make a judgment in advance. It is executed by the determination means and the result is stored in the pending information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means becomes capable of starting dynamic display, each time new pending information is stored in the pending information storing means, a preliminary determination is made. Based on the determination result, the dynamic display mode is determined in advance by the dynamic display mode determination means and stored in the pending information storage means. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means becomes capable of starting dynamic display, based on the determination result of the propriety determination means executed in that case , the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. As a result, even if pending information is newly stored and the order in which the dynamic display is started is changed, and the validity judgment result of previously stored pending information is changed, the validity judgment result can be changed. It can be re-determined in advance as appropriate. Therefore, the dynamic display mode can be determined again based on the latest propriety determination result, and the order in which the dynamic display starts can be correctly determined. Thus, the pending presentations can be reordered in the order in which the dynamic presentation begins.

It has main control means for performing main control of the game, and subordinate control means for executing game control based on the subordinate control signal from the main control means, and the main control means satisfies the first success/failure determination condition. Based on the establishment of the first lottery game execution of the success/failure determination, based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition has a success determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game, the sub-control means, a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of a win/fail determination of a first lottery game by a win/fail determination means of the main control means in the order in which the first win/fail determination conditions are satisfied; Second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means of the means is dynamically displayed in the order in which the second success/failure determination conditions are established, and the first identification information is displayed. The first display means has a display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the second identification information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a hit, A gaming machine in which a privilege game advantageous to a player is awarded when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means in a display mode indicating a win. wherein the main control means determines a dynamic display mode in which the first or second identification information is dynamically displayed for a predetermined dynamic display time based on the determination result of the propriety determination means. determination means; display mode signal generation means for generating a display mode signal based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and outputting the display mode signal to the slave control means; When one of the pieces of information is stopped and displayed in a winning display mode, and the other piece of first or second identification information is being displayed dynamically, a discontinuation signal for instructing discontinuation of the dynamic display. and a management signal generating means for generating a restart signal instructing restart of the interrupted dynamic display based on the end of the bonus game based on the win, wherein the display of the slave control means The control means dynamically displays the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal on the first or second display means based on the reception of the display mode signal, and the slave control means: dynamic display time measuring means for measuring a dynamic display time based on the reception of the display mode signal; and suspension of measurement by the dynamic display time measuring means based on the reception of the suspension signal. determining the remaining dynamic display time of the suspended dynamic display mode from the time measured by the dynamic display time measuring means based on the reception of the restart signal, and according to the remaining dynamic display time, determining the dynamic redisplay mode, which is the dynamic display mode to be displayed during the remaining dynamic display time of the interrupted first or second identification information; and display mode determining means.

According to the gaming machine H1, game control is executed by the sub-control means according to the sub-control signal from the main control means that executes the main control of the game. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Further, in the sub-control means, dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the display control means stops and displays the first or second identification information in a display mode indicating the win, a privilege game advantageous to the player is provided. . Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Further, in the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines a dynamic display mode for dynamically displaying the first or second identification information for a predetermined dynamic display time. A display mode signal is generated by the display mode signal generation means based on the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means and output to the slave control means. Then, when one of the first and second identification information is statically displayed in a display mode indicating a win, if the other first or second identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is performed. A suspension signal instructing suspension is generated by the management signal generating means. On the other hand, when the bonus game based on the win is completed, the management signal generation means generates a restart signal for instructing the restart of the interrupted dynamic display. Further, in the slave control means, the dynamic display mode indicated by the display mode signal is displayed by the display control means on the first or second display means based on the reception of the display mode signal. Based on the reception of the display mode signal from the main control means, the dynamic display time is measured by the dynamic display time measuring means. Measurement by the dynamic display time measurement means is interrupted by the slave time management means based on the reception of the interruption signal from the main control means. On the other hand, based on the reception of the restart signal from the main control means, the remaining dynamic display time of the suspended dynamic display mode is determined from the measured time of the dynamic display time measuring means, and the remaining The dynamic display mode, which is the dynamic display mode to be displayed during the remaining dynamic display time of the interrupted first or second identification information, is determined by the passive re-display mode determination means according to the dynamic display time of be done. Therefore, when starting the dynamic display of the first or second identification information that has been interrupted during the bonus game, the dynamic redisplay mode is determined according to the remaining time. The lottery results can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner in a dynamic re-display mode according to the display time. Further, even if the main control means does not select the dynamic re-display mode according to the remaining dynamic display time and instruct the sub-control means, the sub-control means can perform the dynamic re-display according to the remaining dynamic display time. Since the display mode is determined, the control load on the main control means can be reduced. Therefore, even in a gaming machine that executes the first lottery game and the second lottery game at the same time, it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the main control means and perform various game effects.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine H1, the passive redisplay mode determining means configures the dynamic display time within the reference time when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is not longer than the reference time. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, a dynamic redisplay mode longer than the reference time is determined. The game machine H2 is characterized in that it determines the normal dynamic re-display mode, which is the dynamic re-display mode constituted by the display time.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is equal to or less than the reference time, the slave control means selects the short dynamic display mode, which is the dynamic display mode configured with the dynamic display time within the reference time. A display mode is determined by the passive re-display mode determining means. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining dynamic display time is longer than the reference time, the normal dynamic redisplay mode is determined by the passive redisplay determining means. Therefore, the dynamic redisplay mode can be determined according to the remaining dynamic display time. Therefore, even when the remaining dynamic display time becomes short, the determination result of the lottery game can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by determining the dedicated dynamic re-display mode.

A success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination of a first lottery game based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/failure determination of a second lottery game based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition, and the success/failure determination thereof. First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of right/failure determination in the order in which the second right/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a win, and the display control means displays the information on the first or second display means. a bonus game executing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, wherein Based on the establishment of the condition, determine the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established propriety judgment condition, and based on the establishment of the second propriety judgment condition, the second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of identification information; and a number-of-times determining means for determining the number of times the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the retention storage means are satisfied, wherein the dynamic display mode determination When the number-of-times judging means judges that the number of times each of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is satisfied is different by a predetermined number of times or more, the second success/failure determination condition having the greater number of times of satisfaction is determined. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second yes/no determination condition is a dynamic display mode with a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second yes/no determination condition, whichever is smaller. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that it determines a dynamic display mode.

According to claim I1, the dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/fail determination result of the first lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are established. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the reserve storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number of times, respectively. The frequency determination means determines the number of times the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are satisfied. When the number-of-times determining means determines that the number of times each of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is satisfied is different from the predetermined number of times or more, the dynamic display mode determining means selects the condition with the greater number of times of satisfaction. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition is dynamically displayed for a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition whichever is met less frequently. It decides on the short dynamic display mode which is the mode. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the success/failure determination condition that has been established more frequently is performed in a short period of time. Adjustment can be made so as to reduce the difference in the number of times that the conditions are met. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are met can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

A success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination of a first lottery game based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/failure determination of a second lottery game based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition, and the success/failure determination thereof. First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of right/failure determination in the order in which the second right/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a win, and the display control means displays the information on the first or second display means. a bonus game executing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, wherein Based on the establishment of the condition, determine the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established propriety judgment condition, and based on the establishment of the second propriety judgment condition, the second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of identification information; and a number-of-times determining means for determining the number of times the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the retention storage means are satisfied, wherein the dynamic display mode determination When the number-of-times judging means judges that the number of times each of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is satisfied is different by a predetermined number of times or more, the second condition having the smaller number of times of success/failure is determined. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition is a dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition, whichever is greater. A game machine I2 characterized in that it determines a dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I2, dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/fail determination result of the first lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/fail determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are established. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. performed by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the reserve storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number of times, respectively. The frequency determination means determines the number of times the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are met. When the number-of-times determining means determines that the number of times each of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is met differs by a predetermined number of times or more, the dynamic display mode determining means selects the one with the smaller number of times of satisfaction. The dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition is dynamically displayed for a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition whichever is met more frequently. It decides on the long dynamic display mode which is the mode. By determining the long dynamic display mode in this manner, the lottery game corresponding to the success/failure judgment condition having the smaller number of establishment times becomes longer, and the number of establishment times of the success/failure judgment condition stored in the holding storage means is less likely to decrease. , adjustment can be made so that the difference in the number of times that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are met is reduced. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

In the game machine I1 or I2, when dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second success/failure determination condition becomes newly possible, the number-of-times determining means is stored in the holding storage means. The dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result determined by the number of times determination means. A gaming machine I3 characterized by that

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the establishment of the first or second right/wrong judgment condition becomes newly possible, the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition stored in the reserved storage means is determined by the number of times determining means. Then, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode based on the determination result. Therefore, the dynamic display mode determination means can determine the dynamic display mode based on the latest information on the number of establishments stored in the reservation storage means in accordance with the timing of starting the dynamic display.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the dynamic display mode determination means, when the determination result of the win/fail determination means is winning, regardless of the determination result of the number of times determination means, the dynamic display mode is determined, and when the determination result of the success/fail determination means is a failure, the dynamic display mode is determined based on the determination result of the number of times determination means. .

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination result of the win/fail determination means is hit, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means regardless of the determination result of the number of times determination means. On the other hand, when the determination result of the success/fail determination means is out, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the determination result of the number of times determination means. Therefore, in the case of a hit, the normal dynamic display mode indicating the win is determined, and the player can have a sufficient sense of anticipation as to whether or not it will be a privilege game. By determining the dynamic display mode for adjusting the number of establishments stored in the reservation storage means, it is possible to prevent the performance of the game from being spoiled.

A game machine I5 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines I1 to I4, the difference equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times is determined to be a difference of two times or more.

According to the game machine described in game machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine described in any one of game machines I1 to I4, when it is determined that there is a difference of two times or more, it is stored in the reservation storage means. Since the dynamic display mode is determined for adjusting the number of establishment times, it is possible to prevent frequent determination of the short dynamic display mode or the long dynamic display mode, which makes the game effect difficult to understand. can be prevented.

In any one of the game machines I1, I3 to I5, the dynamic display mode determining means determines whether the first or second success/failure determination condition, whichever has the greater number of times of satisfaction, is satisfied a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine I6 is characterized in that the short dynamic display mode is determined when the number of times determining means determines that there is a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1, I3 to I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times the first or second yes/no determination condition, whichever is greater in the number of times of satisfaction stored in the holding storage means, has been satisfied is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, and the difference is equal to or greater than the number of times determined in advance by the number of times determination means. If so, the short dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Therefore, when the number of establishment times equal to or greater than the predetermined number is not stored, the short dynamic display mode is not determined even if the number of times determination means has a difference equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times. It is possible to suppress monotonous presentation of the game by determining the mode.

In any one of the game machines I2 to I5, the dynamic display mode determination means determines that the number of times the first or second success/failure determination condition is satisfied is a predetermined number or more, and A game machine I7 characterized in that the long dynamic display mode is determined when the determining means determines that there is a difference equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times the first or second yes/no determination condition, whichever is greater in the number of times of satisfaction stored in the holding storage means, has been satisfied is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, and the difference is equal to or greater than the number of times determined in advance by the number of times determination means. When it is determined that the long dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Therefore, when the number of establishment times equal to or greater than the predetermined number is not stored, the long dynamic display mode is not determined even if there is a difference equal to or greater than the predetermined number of times determined by the number of times determination means. It is possible to suppress monotonous presentation of the game by determining the mode.

In any one of gaming machines I2 to I5 and I7, the dynamic display mode determining means moves the identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserved storage means. Before the target display can be started, each of the dynamic display modes is determined in advance, and among the dynamic display modes determined in advance, the propriety determination is made for the one with the greater number of establishment times stored in the holding storage means. A gaming machine I8 characterized in that one of the plurality of long dynamic display modes is determined based on the dynamic display modes corresponding to conditions.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5 and I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, before dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first suitability determination condition and the second suitability determination condition stored in the reserve storage means becomes possible, the dynamic display mode is determined. respectively pre-determined by means. Among the dynamic display modes determined in advance, one of the plurality of long dynamic display modes is selected based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination condition with the larger number of times of satisfaction stored in the holding storage means. is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means. Therefore, by determining the long dynamic display mode based on the dynamic display mode determined in advance corresponding to the propriety determination condition with the smaller number of times of establishment stored in the holding storage means, the difference in the number of times of establishment It is possible to determine a long dynamic representation that is more suitable for reducing .

In any one of the game machines I2 to I5, I7 or I8, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserved storage means. before the dynamic display can be started, each of the dynamic display modes is determined in advance, and among the pre-determined dynamic display modes, the one with the greater number of establishment times stored in the holding storage means A gaming machine I9, characterized in that the dynamic display time of the long dynamic display mode is determined based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the success/fail judgment condition.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I2 to I5, I7 or I8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display mode determines the dynamic display mode before the dynamic display of the identification information can be started even though the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserved storage means are met. respectively pre-determined by means. Long-term dynamic display based on the dynamic display time of the dynamic display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination condition in the one with the greater number of establishment times stored in the reserved storage means among the dynamic display modes determined in advance A dynamic presentation time of the aspect is determined by the dynamic presentation aspect determination means. Therefore, since the long dynamic display mode is determined in accordance with the dynamic display time of the determined dynamic display mode with the larger number of times of establishment, it is possible to further reduce the difference in the number of times of establishment.

A success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination of a first lottery game based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/failure determination of a second lottery game based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition, and the success/failure determination thereof. First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of right/failure determination in the order in which the second right/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a win, and the display control means displays the information on the first or second display means. a bonus game executing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, wherein Based on the establishment of the condition, determine the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established propriety judgment condition, and based on the establishment of the second propriety judgment condition, the second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of identification information; continuous establishment monitoring means for determining whether one of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is continuously satisfied; and the dynamic display mode determination When the continuous satisfaction monitoring means determines that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is continuously met, the first or the second The dynamic display mode corresponding to the success/failure determination condition is changed to a short dynamic display mode, which is a dynamic display mode having a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second success/failure determination condition. A gaming machine I10 characterized in that it determines.

According to the gaming machine I10, dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/fail determination result of the first lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. performed by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the reserve storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number of times, respectively. Then, whether or not one of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is continuously met is determined by the continuous satisfaction monitoring means. When the continuous satisfaction monitoring means determines that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition has been successively met, the dynamic display mode determination means determines whether the first or second success/failure determination condition has been successively met. A short dynamic display mode in which the dynamic display mode corresponding to the second success/failure determination condition is a dynamic display mode having a shorter dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the other first or second success/failure determination condition. to decide. By determining the short-dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the win-or-fail judgment condition that has been established continuously is performed in a short time, so that the first win-or-fail judgment condition stored in the holding storage means and the Adjustments can be made so that the difference in the number of times that the second success/failure determination condition is satisfied becomes small. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

A success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination of a first lottery game based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/failure determination of a second lottery game based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition, and the success/failure determination thereof. First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of right/failure determination in the order in which the second right/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a win, and the display control means displays the information on the first or second display means. a bonus game executing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, wherein Based on the establishment of the condition, determine the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established propriety judgment condition, and based on the establishment of the second propriety judgment condition, the second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of identification information; continuous establishment monitoring means for determining whether one of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is continuously satisfied; and the dynamic display mode determination means, when the continuous satisfaction monitoring means determines that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is continuously satisfied, the first or second success/failure determination condition, which is not continuously satisfied, The dynamic display mode corresponding to the second success/failure determination condition is a dynamic display mode having a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition that is satisfied in succession. A gaming machine I11 characterized in that it determines a certain long dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I11, dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the win/fail determination result of the first lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first win/fail determination conditions are met. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are established. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. performed by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established, the right to play the first or second lottery game is stored by the reserve storage means up to a predetermined upper limit number of times, respectively. Then, whether or not one of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is continuously met is determined by the continuous satisfaction monitoring means. When the continuous satisfaction monitoring means determines that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition has been continuously A dynamic display mode with a longer dynamic display time than the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success judgment condition that satisfies the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success judgment condition in succession. is determined as the long dynamic display mode. By determining the long dynamic display mode in this way, the lottery game corresponding to the success/failure determination condition which is not successively met is lengthened, and the number of times the success/failure determination condition stored in the holding storage means is satisfied is reduced. Since it becomes difficult, it is possible to adjust so that the difference in the number of times that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition that are stored in the reserve storage means are satisfied becomes small. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/failure determination condition and the second right/failure determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

A gaming machine I12 characterized by having a condition allocating means for assisting alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition in any one of the gaming machines I1 to I11.

According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the condition sorting means assists so that the first yes/no judgment condition and the second yes/no judgment condition are satisfied alternately. Therefore, the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition are established substantially evenly, and the number of establishments of the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition can be easily stored in the holding storage means up to the upper limit number of times.

The gaming machine I10 or I12 has a frequency determination means for determining the number of times the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the holding storage means are established,
The dynamic display mode determination means does not determine that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is successively met by the continuous satisfaction monitoring means, and the number of times determination means determines whether the first When it is determined that the number of times each of the success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is met differs by a predetermined number of times or more, the first or second success/failure determination condition, whichever is met more frequently, is handled. A game machine I13 characterized in that the dynamic display mode to be played is determined to be the short dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I10 or I12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are met is determined by the frequency determination means. The continuous satisfaction monitoring means does not determine that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is successively satisfied, and the number of times determination means determines whether the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are satisfied. If it is determined that there is a difference of a predetermined number of times or more between the respective establishment counts, the dynamic display mode determining means selects the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition with the larger number of establishment times. , determine the short dynamic display mode. By determining the short dynamic display mode in this way, even if the conditions are not satisfied consecutively, if there is a difference of a predetermined number or more in the number of times that the conditions are satisfied, the success/failure determination condition corresponding to the condition that is satisfied more often can be met. Since the lottery game is played in a short period of time, the difference in the number of establishments between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means can be adjusted to be small. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

The game machine I11 or I12 has a frequency determination means for determining the number of times the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the holding storage means are established,
The dynamic display mode determination means does not determine that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is successively met by the continuous satisfaction monitoring means, and the number of times determination means performs the first success/failure determination. Triggered by the fact that it is determined that there is a difference of a predetermined number of times or more in the number of times each of the condition and the second yes/no judgment condition is satisfied, the first or second yes/no judgment condition corresponding to the lesser number of times of satisfaction is determined. A gaming machine I14 characterized in that the dynamic display mode is determined to be the long dynamic display mode.

According to the gaming machine I14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I11 or I12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number of times that the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition stored in the reserve storage means are met is determined by the frequency determination means. The continuous satisfaction monitoring means does not determine that either the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition is successively satisfied, and the number of times determination means determines whether the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are satisfied. If it is determined that there is a difference of a predetermined number of times or more between the respective establishment counts, the dynamic display mode determining means selects the dynamic display mode corresponding to the first or second success/failure determination condition with the larger number of establishment times. , determine the short dynamic display mode. By determining the long dynamic display mode in this way, even if the conditions are not satisfied consecutively, if there is a difference of a predetermined number or more in the number of times that the conditions are satisfied, the judgment condition corresponding to the lesser number of times that the conditions are satisfied can be handled. Since the lottery game to be played becomes longer and the number of establishments of the success/failure judgment conditions stored in the holding storage means becomes difficult to decrease, the difference in the number of establishments between the first success/failure judgment conditions and the second success/failure judgment conditions stored in the holding storage means. can be adjusted to be smaller. Therefore, the number of times that the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition are satisfied can be easily stored in the reserve storage means evenly up to the upper limit number of times, and overflow can be suppressed.

Triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition in any one of game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, and G1, it is displayed at that time. A gaming machine characterized in that it has rearrangement notification means for notifying an executed notification mode indicating that the rearrangement has been executed when the rearrangement is executed by the rearrangement means in the pending display mode. J1.

According to the game machine J1, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, and G1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied and rearrangement is executed for the pending display modes displayed at that time, the executed notification modes indicating that the rearrangement has been executed are arranged. It is notified by the replacement notification means. In this way, the player can identify whether the currently displayed pending display mode indicates the order of establishment or the order in which the dynamic display starts, based on the execution notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's confusion in the game.

In the gaming machine of the gaming machine J1, the rearrangement notification means displays, as the executed notification mode, the execution of the rearrangement on the holding display means in a recognizable display mode. Game machine J2 to play.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the executed notification mode, the rearrangement notification means displays in a display mode in which it is identifiable that the rearrangement has been executed on the pending display means. Therefore, by notifying the execution completion notification mode to the same suspension display means as the suspension display mode, the execution completion notification mode can be displayed closer to the suspension display mode, so that the player does not miss the execution completion notification mode. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent it from being put away.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the rearrangement notification means is configured to indicate that the rearrangement has been executed in the pending display mode displayed when the rearrangement is executed by the rearrangement means. While notifying in the executed notification mode, the pending display mode displayed after the sorting is executed by the sorting means is notified in the non-execution notification mode indicating that the sorting has not been performed. Game machine J3 to play.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rearrangement notification means notifies the suspended display mode displayed when the rearrangement is executed by the rearrangement means. On the other hand, for the pending display mode displayed after the sorting is executed by the sorting means, the sorting notifying means notifies the unexecuted notification mode indicating that the sorting has not been executed. Therefore, the player can distinguish whether the rearrangement has been executed or the rearrangement has not been executed, so that the player can more easily recognize the order in which the reserved display modes are arranged, thereby preventing confusion in the game. .

In any one of the game machines J1 to J3, when the predetermined condition is established, the holding display modes rearranged by the rearrangement means in an order different from the establishment order are individually displayed. The rearrangement notification means has a rearrangement identification means for identifying, and the rearrangement notification means is displayed in a rearrangement order different from the establishment order based on the information identified by the rearrangement identification means as the executed notification mode. A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it notifies in a display mode indicating that it is in the holding display mode.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition is established, the pending display modes rearranged by the rearrangement means in an order different from the establishment order are individually identified by the rearrangement identification means. As the executed notification mode, the rearrangement notification means notifies a display mode indicating a pending display mode displayed in a rearrangement order different from the establishment order based on the information identified by the rearrangement identification means. . As a result, the player can easily recognize the pending display modes in which the variation start order is different from the establishment order, and can more easily recognize the order in which the pending display modes are displayed.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the holding display means includes an establishment order holding display area for displaying the holding display mode in the order of establishment, and the dynamic and a start order reserved display area for displaying the reserved display modes in the order of display start, wherein the reserved display modes are displayed in the establishment order reserved display area while the predetermined condition is satisfied. Triggered by this, in the order of starting the dynamic display rearranged by the rearrangement means in the start order reserved display area while maintaining the display in the reserved display mode in the establishment order reserved display area A gaming machine J5 characterized in that a pending display mode is displayed.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, it is displayed by the order of establishment reservation display area of the reservation display means in the order in which the reservation display modes are established. In addition to the establishment order reservation display area, the reservation display modes are displayed in the start order reservation display area of the reservation display means in the order in which the dynamic display is started. While the pending display mode is displayed in the order-of-establishment pending display area, when a predetermined condition is met, the display of the pending display mode in the order-of-establishment pending display area is maintained and the start-order pending display area is displayed. , the pending display modes are displayed in the order sorted by the sorting means. As a result, the player can simultaneously identify the pending display mode before rearrangement and after rearrangement is executed, and can easily determine how the rearrangement is executed.

In one of gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, and J1 to J5, the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a win. temporarily stopping means for temporarily stopping the first or second identification information during dynamic display; re-dynamic display start means for dynamically displaying the display mode again, and based on the fact that the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a win, the dynamic display start time information The determining means dynamically determines the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means is dynamically displayed starting from the end of the privilege game. A game machine K1 characterized in that the time information until the start of display is re-determined and stored in the hold information storage means.

According to the gaming machine K1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, and J1 to J5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop means when the first or second identification information is displayed in the display mode indicating the win. After the end of the privilege game, the dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped first or second identification information is dynamically displayed again by the re-dynamic display starting means. Dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending information display means is started based on the display of the first or second identification information in the display mode indicating the win. The time information until the start of dynamic display starting from the end of the privilege game is re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the reserved information storage means. Thus, when the privilege game is started, the time information until the start of the dynamic display is re-determined as the time information starting from the end of the privilege game. The pending display modes can also be rearranged in the correct order to start the dynamic display even if the specified condition is met.

In the gaming machine K1, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a win, the dynamic display start time information determining means determines whether the second identification information temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means is displayed. For the pending information stored in the pending information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information, the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily stopped identification information and the stored pending information correspond to Based on the dynamic display mode, the time information from the end of the privilege game to the start of the dynamic display is re-determined, and on the other hand, the first or second identification displayed in the display mode indicating the win. Dynamic display starting from the end of the privilege game based on the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored hold information for the hold information stored in the hold information storage means corresponding to the information A gaming machine K2 characterized by re-determining the time until the game starts.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating winning, it is stored in the holding information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information temporarily stopped by the temporary stopping means. Based on the remaining dynamic display mode of the temporarily suspended identification information and the dynamic display mode corresponding to the stored suspension information, dynamic display mode starting from the end of the privilege game The time information until the display starts is re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. On the other hand, with respect to the pending information stored in the pending information storage means corresponding to the first or second identification information displayed in the display mode indicating the win, a dynamic display corresponding to the stored pending information Based on the mode, the time from the end of the privilege game to the start of the dynamic display is re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. Therefore, the hold information corresponding to the temporarily stopped identification information and the hold information that is not temporarily stopped are distinguished from each other, and the time information until the start of the dynamic display is determined, so that the dynamic display is more accurate. Time information to start can be determined.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the holding information storage means stores the success/failure determination information used for the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means and the dynamic display mode determination based on the establishment of the first or second success/failure determination condition. a normal reserved storage area for storing normal reserved information having at least dynamic display determination information used for determining a dynamic display mode by means; Before the second identification information becomes dynamically displayable, based on the normal pending information, the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means, the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means, and the dynamic display start. While the time information is determined by the time information determining means and stored as sorting information, the first or second identification information is displayed in a display mode indicating a win, and is used as the sorting information. a rearrangement pending storage area in which the stored time information is updated to the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored; When the condition is newly established, the normal suspension stored in the newly established normal suspension storage area is based on the time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the rearrangement suspension storage area. determining the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the information and the normal reservation information previously stored in the normal reservation storage area is started, and determining the order in the sequence; A gaming machine K3 characterized by having rearrangement order determination means for storing in a rearrangement reservation storage area.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the establishment of the first or second right/wrong determination condition, the right/wrong determination information used for the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means and the dynamic display determination information used for determining the dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determination means is stored in the normal suspension storage area of the suspension information storage means. Before dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the normal reservation information stored in the normal reservation storage area becomes possible, the result of right or wrong judgment by the right or wrong judging means and the dynamic display are performed in advance based on the normal reservation information. The dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining means and the time information by the dynamic display start time information determining means are determined and stored as the sorting information in the sorting pending storage area of the pending information storing means. On the other hand, when the first or second identification information is displayed in the display mode indicating the win, the time information stored as the rearrangement information is changed to the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. It is updated and stored in the reordering pending storage area. When the first or second propriety determination condition is newly satisfied, the information is stored in the newly satisfied normal reserved storage area based on the time information corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting reserved storage area. The rearrangement order determining means determines the order in which the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the normal reservation information and the normal reservation information previously stored in the normal reservation storage area is started. , and its order is stored in the reordering reservation storage area. As a result, the data for executing the lottery game and the data for determining the order of sorting can be processed separately, and the process of determining the order of sorting can be easily performed. Further, even when the privilege game starts, the time information is updated with the time information starting from the end of the privilege game, so that the rearrangement can be easily executed even during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine K3, the rearrangement order determining means corresponds to each rearrangement information stored ahead of the rearrangement reservation storage area when the first or second success/failure determination condition is satisfied during the privilege game. Based on the time information re-determined by the dynamic display start time determination means, the normal suspension information stored in the newly established normal suspension storage area and the information previously stored in the normal suspension storage area Starting from the end of the privilege game of the first identification information and the second identification information respectively corresponding to the normal hold information, the order of starting the dynamic display is determined, and the order is determined. A gaming machine K4 characterized by being stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is established during the privilege game, the time re-determined by the dynamic display start time determination means corresponding to each sorting information stored ahead of the sorting reservation storage area. Based on the information, first identification information and second identification information respectively corresponding to the normal reservation information stored in the newly established normal reservation storage area and the normal reservation information previously stored in the normal reservation storage area. Starting from the end of the privilege game, the order in which the dynamic display is started is determined by the rearrangement order determination means, and the order is stored in the rearrangement reservation storage area.

Therefore, even for the first or second success/failure determination condition established during the privilege game, the order of starting more accurate dynamic display is determined, and the reserved display mode is displayed in the order of starting accurate dynamic display. can be rearranged. Therefore, confusion of the player can be suppressed even when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is established during the privilege game.

It has a main control means for executing main control of the game, and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Then, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game, and the success/failure of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. Based on the determination result, the first success/failure determination signal is generated based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. , the sub control means, based on the first success determination signal, the first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success determination result of the first lottery game, and the second success determination signal a second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game; 2. In a gaming machine in which a privilege game that is advantageous to a player is awarded when the first or second identification information indicating winning is stopped and displayed on the display means, the main control means determines the first win/fail determination condition. Based on the establishment, a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is determined, and based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition, second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode; Until the display is started, the propriety determination information related to the propriety determination by the propriety determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main reserved information. main pending information storage means for identifiably storing order information in which the success/failure judgment condition corresponding to the pending information is satisfied and whether the established success/failure judgment condition is the first success/failure judgment condition or the second success/failure judgment condition; a main hold information signal generating means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information relating to the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means; said slave control means has, on the basis of receipt of said main hold information signal, slave hold information storage means for storing information relating to main hold information indicated by said main hold information signal as slave hold information; While distinguishing the secondary pending information of the first true/false determination condition and the second true/false determination condition stored in the secondary pending information storage means, the first true/false determination condition and the second true/false determination condition are stored for each secondary pending information. Based on the pending display means for displaying the order in which the success/failure determination conditions are met in an identifiable pending display manner, and the secondary pending information stored in the secondary pending information storage means, the main control means dynamically a secondary display mode discriminating means for discriminating a dynamic display mode determined by the display mode determining means; the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and each of the sub-retained information previously stored in the sub-retained information storage means are discriminated by the subordinate display mode discriminating means; Based on the dynamic display mode, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary hold information starts to be dynamically displayed is determined and stored in the secondary hold information storage means. and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display start time information determination means suspends the display based on each of the time information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means. A gaming machine L1, characterized in that it has rearrangement means for rearranging the pending display modes displayed on the display means in the order of starting the dynamic display.

According to the game machine L1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. In the main control means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination means The success/failure determination information related to the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means serve as main pending information, and the success/failure determination condition corresponding to the main pending information is established. The order information obtained and the established success/failure judgment condition are stored in the main reserved information storage means so as to be identifiable as to whether they are the first success/failure judgment condition or the second success/failure judgment condition. In the main control means, the main hold information signal generating means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information relating to the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored. be. Upon receiving the main hold information signal, the subsidiary control means stores information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the subsidiary hold information in the subsidiary hold information storage means. While distinguishing the sub-holding information of the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition stored in the sub-pending information storage means, the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition are combined for each sub-holding information. The order in which the success/failure determination conditions are met is displayed by the pending display means as a display in a recognizable pending display mode. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is discriminated by the slave display mode determination means based on the slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means. When the secondary pending information is newly stored in the secondary pending information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the secondary pending information storage means are previously stored in the secondary pending information storage means. The time until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new subordinate pending information can be displayed dynamically based on the dynamic display mode determined by the subordinate display mode determining means for each subordinate pending information. Information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the secondary pending information storage means. Then, in the slave control means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is changed based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. They are sorted by the sorting means in the order in which the dynamic display is started. As a result, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, it is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier. Earlier than the display start time. However, since the pending display mode is displayed in order in the pending display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions including the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the first lottery stored first is displayed in order. The suspension display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the game suspension information. As a result, the order in which the actual dynamic display starts may differ from the order in which the success/fail judgment conditions are established. They are sorted and displayed in starting order. Therefore, even if the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual win-or-fail judgment conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to change the dynamic display start order. Since the reserved display modes are rearranged, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed. Further, the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the pending display modes in the dynamic display start order, and the process is executed by the slave control means, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

It has a main control means for executing main control of the game, and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Then, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game, and the success/failure of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. Based on the determination result, the first success/failure determination signal is generated based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. , the sub control means, based on the first success determination signal, the first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success determination result of the first lottery game, and the second success determination signal a second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game; 2. In a gaming machine in which a privilege game advantageous to a player is awarded when the first or second identification information indicating win is stopped and displayed on the display means, the main control means controls the first or second win/fail. distinguishing between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and generating a success signal for notifying that the first or second success/failure determination condition has been satisfied; Establishment signal generating means for outputting to the sub-control means in the order in which the first or second success judgment conditions are met; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition;
When the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means The success/failure determination information and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main reservation information, and the success/failure determination condition corresponding to the main reservation information is satisfied and the order information that the success/failure determination condition is satisfied. Main pending information storage means for identifiably storing whether the propriety judgment condition is the first propriety judgment condition or the second propriety judgment condition, and the main pending information is stored in the main pending information storage means. and a main hold information signal generating means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information related to the stored main hold information based on the main hold information signal generation means, wherein the slave control means receives the establishment signal. Based on this, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the success/failure determination condition that triggered the generation of the establishment signal can be displayed dynamically, information on the number of times the establishment signal has been received is displayed. , distinguishing between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition indicated by the fulfillment signal, and identifying the order in which the success/failure determination conditions combined with the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established. Based on the sub-holding number storage means stored as sub-holding number information respectively, and the sub-holding number information stored in the sub-holding number storage means, the first propriety judgment condition and the second propriety judgment condition While distinguishing each of the subordinate pending number information, the establishment order of the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition for each subordinate pending number information is displayed in an identifiable pending display mode. a secondary hold information storage means for storing information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as secondary hold information based on the reception of the main hold information signal; and the secondary hold information Subordinate display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means based on the subordinate pending information stored in the storage means; When the secondary pending information is stored, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means is first stored in the secondary pending information storage means. The first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information is dynamically displayed based on the dynamic display mode determined by the secondary display mode determining means for each of the secondary pending information. dynamic display start time information determining means for determining time information until the time until the display is completed and stored in the sub-holding information storage means; rearranging means for rearranging the suspension display modes displayed on the suspension display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on the time information stored in the secondary suspension information storage means by the means. A game machine L2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine L2 description, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The main control means distinguishes between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first or second success/failure determination condition, and determines whether the first or second success/failure determination condition has been satisfied. is generated by the establishment signal generating means, and is output to the sub-control means in the order in which the first or second yes/no judging conditions are established. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. In the main control means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination means The success/failure determination information related to the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means serve as main pending information, and the success/failure determination condition corresponding to the main pending information is established. The order information obtained and the established success/failure judgment condition are stored in the main reserved information storage means so as to be identifiable as to whether they are the first success/failure judgment condition or the second success/failure judgment condition. In the main control means, the main hold information signal generating means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information relating to the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored. be. Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the establishment signal, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the success/failure determination condition that triggered the generation of the establishment signal becomes dynamically displayable. , the information about the number of times the establishment signal is received distinguishes between the first judgment condition and the second judgment condition, and the judgment condition that combines the first judgment condition and the second judgment condition. are stored in the sub-retained number storage means as sub-retained number information so that the order of establishment of is identifiable. In the subordinate control means, based on the subordinate pending number information stored in the subordinate pending number storage means, while distinguishing the subordinate pending number information for the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition, for each subordinate pending number information The order in which the success/failure determination conditions, which are the combination of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition, is established is performed by the suspension display means as a display in an identifiable suspension display mode. Upon receiving the main hold information signal, the slave control means stores information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the subsidiary hold information in the subsidiary hold information storage means. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means is determined by the passive display mode determining means based on the secondary pending information stored in the secondary pending information storage means. In the slave control means, when the slave hold information is newly stored in the slave hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the slave hold information storage means dynamically display the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information based on the dynamic display mode determined by the secondary display mode determining means for each secondary pending information stored in is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the sub-holding information storage means. Then, in the slave control means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is changed based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. They are sorted by the sorting means in order to start dynamic display. As a result, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, it is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier. Earlier than the display start time. However, since the pending display mode is displayed in order in the pending display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions including the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the first lottery stored first is displayed in order. The suspension display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the game suspension information. As a result, the order in which the actual dynamic display starts may differ from the order in which the success/fail judgment conditions are established. They are sorted and displayed in starting order. Therefore, even if the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual win-or-fail judgment conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to change the dynamic display start order. Since the pending display modes are rearranged, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed. Further, the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the pending display modes in the dynamic display start order, and the process is executed by the slave control means, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

A gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it has a condition sorting means for assisting alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition in the gaming machine L1 or L2.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1 or L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the sorting means assists the alternate establishment of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition. As a result, the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are likely to be established evenly, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game are efficiently executed, so that many games can be played in a short time. It can be carried out.

In any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the rearrangement means receives the main hold information signal and, when the sub hold information is stored in the sub hold information storage means, The first or second identification information corresponding to the newly established secondary hold information and the previously stored secondary hold information based on the time information corresponding to each previously stored secondary hold information. A gaming machine L4 characterized in that a dynamic display start order is determined, and the order is stored in the secondary hold information storage means in association with the secondary hold information.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the main hold information signal is received and the sub-hold information is stored in the sub-hold information storage means, based on the time information corresponding to each sub-hold information previously stored in the sub-hold information storage means. determines the dynamic display start order of the first or second identification information corresponding to the newly stored pending information and the previously stored pending information, and associates the order with each secondary pending information. It is stored in the secondary hold information storage means by the rearrangement means. As a result, the dynamic display start order is updated each time the secondary hold information is stored. Therefore, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending display modes can be rearranged based on the updated dynamic display start order. Therefore, even when the dynamic display start order is changed, it is possible to rearrange the reserved display modes in the corresponding dynamic display start order, and the player can be notified of the correct dynamic display start order. can be done.

Any one of the game machines L1 to L4 has operation means that can be operated by the player, and the rearrangement means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation means is operated. The game machine L5 is characterized by rearranging the reserved display modes.

According to the game described in the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the player operates the operation means, the reserved display modes are rearranged by the rearrangement means assuming that the predetermined condition is established. As a result, rearrangement can be performed in the reserved display mode at the timing intended by the player, and the correct dynamic display start order can be notified to the player at the timing when the player wants to know the correct dynamic display start order. can be done.

The sorting means rearranges the holding display mode displayed on the holding display means on the assumption that the predetermined condition is met when the establishment signal or the main holding information signal is received. 5. The gaming machine L6 according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized by:

According to the game described in the game machine L6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L4, the following effects are produced. That is, when the establishment signal or the main hold information signal is received from the main control means, the holding display mode displayed on the holding display means is rearranged by the rearrangement means assuming that the predetermined condition is established. Thus, when a new reserved display mode is displayed, the reserved display modes are rearranged, so that the player can know the correct dynamic display start order.

The main control means draws a lottery as to whether or not the winning determination between the first lottery game and the second lottery game to be executed after the privilege game is executed is shifted to a special game state in which winning is more likely than usual. Lottery information is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second success judgment condition, the first or second success judgment condition is established, and main reservation information corresponding to the established judgment condition is stored. game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the main suspension information storage means in association with the main suspension information; and the secondary control means is stored in the secondary suspension information storage means. Until the first or second identification information corresponding to each secondary pending information becomes capable of starting dynamic display, each secondary pending information is corresponded based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. determining whether the game state when the dynamic display of the first or second identification information becomes possible is the special game state according to the lottery information, and executing a preliminary determination of whether or not the game is won in advance; pre-employment determination means for storing the results in the secondary hold information storage means in association with each of the secondary hold information; Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the secondary hold information that has been received becomes possible, the judgment result of the preliminary judgment stored in the secondary hold information storage means by the pre-engagement determination means and the dynamic 7. The game machine L7 according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the dynamic display mode is determined based on display determination information.

According to the game machine described in the game machine L7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines L1 to L6, the following effects are produced. That is, the main control means draws a lottery as to whether or not to shift to a special game state in which the winning judgment between the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the privilege game is more likely to win than the normal time. lottery information is acquired by the gaming state lottery means on the basis of the establishment of the first or second success/fail determination condition. Further, when the first or second success/failure determination condition is satisfied and the main suspension information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition is stored, the lottery information is stored in the game state lottery means in association with the main suspension information. is stored in the main hold information storage means. In the slave control means, the dynamic display start time information determination means determines until the first or second identification information corresponding to each slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means becomes capable of starting dynamic display. Based on the obtained time information, the game state lottery means determines whether the game state when the first or second identification information corresponding to each secondary hold information becomes dynamically displayable is the special game state according to the lottery information. Pre-determination is performed by the pre-determination means to make a decision and to make a yes/no decision in advance. Then, the results are stored in the sub-holding storage means by the sub-prior determination means in association with each sub-holding information. Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means can be started, the pre-engagement determination means determines the preliminary determination stored in the secondary hold information storage means. Based on the result and the dynamic display determination information, the dynamic display mode is discriminated by the slave display discriminating means of the slave control means. As a result, even if the secondary hold information is newly stored and the dynamic display start order is changed, the game state at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the correct dynamic display start order, and the winning/failure determination is performed. will be Therefore, it is possible to determine the dynamic display time information in advance based on the correct result of the success/failure determination, and to determine the dynamic display start order even when a new success/failure determination condition is satisfied next time.

A success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination of a first lottery game based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/failure determination of a second lottery game based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition, and the success/failure determination thereof. First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of right/failure determination in the order in which the second right/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a win, and the display control means displays the information on the first or second display means. a bonus game executing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, wherein condition distribution means for assisting alternate establishment of the condition and the second success/failure determination condition; The reservation storage means for storing the right to play the first or second lottery game until the second lottery game, and the condition distributing means assists in establishing which of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition next. and identification result notification means for notifying the player of information indicating the identification result based on the identification result of the establishment identification means. Characterized gaming machine M1.

According to the gaming machine M1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are established. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Alternating establishment of the first right/wrong determination condition and the second right/wrong determination condition is assisted by the condition sorting means. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established with the assistance of the condition distribution means, the right to play the first or second lottery game up to a predetermined upper limit number is stored by the reservation storage means. Further, the establishment condition identifying means identifies which of the first yes/no judgment condition and the second yes/no judgment condition is to be established next by the condition allocating means. Based on the identification result of the establishment condition identification means, information indicating the identification result is notified to the player by the identification result notification means. As a result, the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are likely to be established evenly, the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be equally stored, and the first lottery game is performed. It is possible to prevent one of the right and the right to play the second lottery game from being prejudicially stored up to the upper limit number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that one of the rights to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game is stored up to the upper limit, but one of the rights exceeds the upper limit and becomes invalid. can. In addition, the identification result notification means notifies which state of the distribution means is the condition for judging whether or not the determination condition is to be established next time. If the success/failure determination condition causes an overflow even if the success/failure determination condition is satisfied, the player can play the game so that the success/failure determination condition is not satisfied, thereby suppressing the overflow.

In the gaming machine M1, a game area and a game ball flowing down the game area enter a first start opening that satisfies the first success/failure determination condition, and a game ball flowing down the game area enters. and a second starting port that satisfies the second propriety determination condition by hitting the ball, and the condition distributing means alternately enters the game ball into the first starting port and the second starting port. 2. The game machine M2 according to claim 1, further comprising a game ball guiding part for assisting the ball.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine M1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start hole, the first win-or-fail judgment condition is established, and when the game ball enters the second start hole, the second win-fail judgment condition is established. be. The alternate entry of game balls into the first start hole and the second start hole is assisted by the game ball guide part of the condition distribution means. As a result, the player makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first start hole and the second start hole alternately by letting the game ball flow down to the game area, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game. Since the execution of and can be performed efficiently, many lottery games can be performed in a shorter time.

In the gaming machine M2, the condition sorting means divides a ball entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a game ball that has entered the ball entrance into the It has a first guideway that guides to the first starting port, and a second guideway that guides to the second starting port via the game ball guide portion, and the game ball guide portion is the input After receiving the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotating it to a predetermined angle in the first direction to guide the game ball to the first guideway, the game ball entered from the ball entrance is then guided to the above-mentioned A game ball is received while rotated in a first direction, and rotated up to a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction to guide the game ball to the second guide path. Characterized game machine M3.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M2, the following effects are produced. That is, the game ball received from the entrance ball entrance of the condition sorting means is rotated in the first direction up to a predetermined angle, and the game ball is guided to the first start opening via the first guide path by the game ball guiding portion. After being guided, it receives a game ball next entered from the ball entrance while being rotated to a predetermined angle in a first direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The game ball is guided by the game ball guide portion to the second starting port through the second guide path. As a result, it is possible to alternately distribute and guide the game balls to the first start port and the second start port by using a common member, and the member to distribute to the first start port and the second start port respectively. The structure for distributing game balls can be compactly configured as compared with the case of providing .

In the gaming machine M3, the game ball guiding portion of the condition sorting means is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance while being rotated in the first direction up to a predetermined angle. A first passive part that receives the entered game ball and rotates up to a predetermined angle in the second direction; A second passive part that is arranged at a facing position and rotates up to a predetermined angle upon receiving the entered game ball; After rotating in two directions, before the next game ball enters the ball entrance, it is prevented from rotating in the first direction, or the second passive part enters from the ball entrance. a rotation regulating portion that prevents the game ball from rotating in the second direction after receiving the ball and rotating in the first direction and before the game ball next enters the ball entrance; A gaming machine M4 characterized by having:

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition allocating means is rotated to a predetermined angle in the first direction. Then, when the first passive part receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the second direction up to a predetermined angle. Further, the second passive part of the game ball guiding part is arranged at a position facing the game ball entering the ball entrance in a state where the game ball guiding part of the condition allocating means is rotated to the predetermined angle in the second direction. When the second passive part receives the entered game ball, it is rotated in the first direction up to a predetermined angle. After the first passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the second direction, it can rotate in the first direction before the next game ball enters the ball entrance. Alternatively, after the second passive part receives the game ball entered from the ball entrance and rotates in the first direction, it rotates in the second direction before the game ball next enters the ball entrance. is prevented by the rotation restricting portion. As a result, after the game ball guiding part rotates and guides the game ball to one guide path, it rotates in the other direction before the next game ball enters, and the ball enters next. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being guided to the same guide path as the game ball entering before the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately alternately guide the game balls entering the ball entrance to the first start hole and the second start hole, and evenly distribute the right to perform the first lottery game and the second lottery game. can be stored in

In any one of the gaming machines M2 to M4, the establishment condition identifying means causes the condition sorting means to cause the game ball to enter next based on the entry of the game ball into the first or second start hole. The game machine M5 is characterized in that it identifies a starting port to be assisted.

According to the game machine described in the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of the game machines M2 to M4, the following effects are obtained. That is, based on the entry of the game ball into the first or second start hole, the establishment condition identification means identifies the start hole to which the condition sorting means assists the next ball entry. Therefore, the player can recognize the start hole to be distributed next, and can play the game while suppressing invalid balls due to overflow.

The establishment condition identification means detects a state in which the game ball guide section rotates, and based on the detection result, the game ball guide section guides the game ball next through the guide path so that the game ball enters. A game machine M6 characterized in that it identifies a starting port to be assisted.

According to the game machine described in the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in the game machine M3 or M4, the following effects are obtained. That is, the game ball guide section of the condition sorting means detects the rotating state, and based on the detection result, the game ball guide section guides the next game ball so that the game ball enters the guide path. is identified by the establishment condition identifying means for the starting port to be assisted by . Therefore, the state of the condition sorting means can be accurately identified and reported, and the player can report more accurate information and play the game so as to suppress the overflow.

It has a main control means for executing main control of the game, and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Then, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game, and the success/failure of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. Based on the determination result, the first success/failure determination signal is generated based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. , the sub control means, based on the first success determination signal, the first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success determination result of the first lottery game, and the second success determination signal a second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game; 2. In a gaming machine in which a privilege game that is advantageous to a player is awarded when the first or second identification information indicating winning is stopped and displayed on the display means, the main control means determines the first win/fail determination condition. Based on the establishment, a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is determined, and based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition, second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode; Until the display is started, the propriety determination information related to the propriety determination by the propriety determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main reserved information. main pending information storage means for identifiably storing order information in which the success/failure determination condition corresponding to the pending information is satisfied and whether the established success/failure determination condition is the first success/failure determination condition or the second success/failure determination condition; When new main pending information is stored in the main pending information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and the remaining dynamic display mode first Until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new main reserved information starts, based on the dynamic display determination information for each main reserved information stored in the main reserved information storage means and determining means for determining the time information and storing it in the main pending information storage means; main holding information signal generating means for generating a main holding information signal for notifying the sub-control means of information relating to the received main holding information and time information corresponding to the main holding information, wherein the sub-control means is a sub-holding information storage means for storing, as sub-holding information, information relating to information indicated by the main holding information signal based on the reception of the main holding information signal; and a first correctness stored in the sub-holding information storage means While distinguishing sub-retained information of the determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition, the order of establishment of the success/failure determination condition combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition for each sub-reserved information is identified. holding display means for displaying in a possible holding display mode; and the active display start time information determining means indicated by the secondary holding information stored in the secondary holding information storage means, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. and rearranging means for rearranging the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on each time information determined by Game machine N1.

According to the gaming machine N1, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. In the main control means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination means The success/failure determination information related to the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means serve as main pending information, and the success/failure determination condition corresponding to the main pending information is established. The order information obtained and the established success/failure judgment condition are stored in the main reserved information storage means so as to be identifiable as to whether they are the first success/failure judgment condition or the second success/failure judgment condition. In the main control means, when new main pending information is stored in the main pending information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the main pending information storing means based on the dynamic display determination information for each piece of main pending information stored in the main pending information, the time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new main pending information can be displayed dynamically It is determined by the display start time information determination means and stored in the secondary hold information storage means. In the main control means, a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information on the stored main hold information and the time information corresponding to the main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored. is generated by the main hold information signal generating means. Upon receiving the main hold information signal, the subsidiary control means stores information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the subsidiary hold information in the subsidiary hold information storage means. While distinguishing the sub-holding information of the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition stored in the sub-pending information storage means, the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition are combined for each sub-holding information. The order in which the success/fail judgment conditions are established is displayed in a recognizable reservation display mode by the reservation display means. Based on each piece of time information determined by the active display start time information determination means indicated by the stored secondary suspension information, the suspension display mode displayed on the suspension display means is rearranged in the order in which dynamic display is started. be rearranged. As a result, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, it is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier. Earlier than the display start time. However, since the pending display mode is displayed in order in the pending display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions including the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the first lottery stored first is displayed in order. The suspension display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the game suspension information. As a result, the order in which the actual dynamic display is started may differ from the order in which the success/failure determination conditions are established. They are sorted and displayed in starting order. Therefore, even if the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual success/failure determination conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to perform dynamic display in the order in which dynamic display is started. Since the pending display modes are rearranged, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed. Further, the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the pending display modes in the dynamic display start order, and the process is executed by the slave control means, so that the control load on the main control means can be suppressed.

It has a main control means for executing main control of the game, and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Then, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game, and the success/failure of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. Based on the determination result, the first success/failure determination signal is generated based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. , the sub control means, based on the first success determination signal, the first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success determination result of the first lottery game, and the second success determination signal a second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game; 2. In a gaming machine in which a privilege game that is advantageous to a player is awarded when the first or second identification information indicating winning is stopped and displayed on the display means, the main control means determines the first win/fail determination condition. Based on the establishment, a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is determined, and based on the establishment of the second success judgment condition, second identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode; Until the display is started, the propriety determination information related to the propriety determination by the propriety determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main reserved information. The order information in which the success/failure judgment condition corresponding to the reserved information is met and whether the established success/failure judgment condition is the first success/failure judgment condition or the second success/failure judgment condition are memorized so as to be identifiable, and stored even when the power is turned off. and main hold information for notifying the slave control means of information on the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information is stored in the main hold information storage means. a main hold information signal generating means for generating a signal, wherein the slave control means sub-holds information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal based on the reception of the main hold information signal. While distinguishing between the secondary pending information storage means stored as information and the secondary pending information of the first adequacy determination condition and the second adequacy determination condition stored in the secondary pending information storage means, the secondary pending information is stored for each secondary pending information. hold display means for displaying the order in which the success/failure determination conditions, which is a combination of the first pass/fail determination condition and the second pass/fail determination condition, is displayed in a discernible hold display mode; and the secondary hold stored in the secondary hold information storage means. Based on the information, the secondary hold information is newly stored in the secondary hold information storage means, and the secondary hold information is newly stored in the secondary hold information storage means. In this case, for each remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed on the first or second display means and each of the subordinate pending information previously stored in the subordinate pending information storage means Based on the dynamic display mode determined by the secondary display mode determining means, time information until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information starts to be displayed dynamically is determined. dynamic display start time information determining means for storing in the secondary pending information storage means; rearranging means for rearranging the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on the stored time information. Game machine N2.

According to the gaming machine N2, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. In the main control means, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. In the main control means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination means The success/failure determination information related to the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means serve as main pending information, and the success/failure determination condition corresponding to the main pending information is established. The order information obtained and the established success/failure judgment condition are stored in the main reserved information storage means so as to be identifiable as to whether they are the first success/failure judgment condition or the second success/failure judgment condition. In the main control means, the main hold information signal generating means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information relating to the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored. be. Upon receiving the main hold information signal, the subsidiary control means stores information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the subsidiary hold information in the subsidiary hold information storage means. While distinguishing the sub-holding information of the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition stored in the sub-pending information storage means, the first right/wrong judgment condition and the second right/wrong judgment condition are combined for each sub-holding information. The order in which the success/failure determination conditions are met is displayed by the pending display means as a display in a recognizable pending display mode. In the slave control means, the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means of the main control means is discriminated by the slave display mode determination means based on the slave hold information stored in the slave hold information storage means. When the secondary pending information is newly stored in the secondary pending information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed and the secondary pending information storage means are previously stored in the secondary pending information storage means. The time until the first or second identification information corresponding to the new subordinate pending information can be displayed dynamically based on the dynamic display mode determined by the subordinate display mode determining means for each subordinate pending information. Information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means and stored in the secondary pending information storage means. Then, in the slave control means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is changed based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. They are sorted by the sorting means in order to start dynamic display. As a result, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, it is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier. Earlier than the display start time. However, since the pending display mode is displayed in order in the pending display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions including the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the first lottery stored first is displayed in order. The suspension display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the game suspension information. As a result, the order in which the actual dynamic display starts may differ from the order in which the success/fail judgment conditions are established. They are sorted and displayed in starting order. Therefore, even if the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual win-or-fail judgment conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to change the dynamic display start order. Since the pending display modes are rearranged, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed. Further, the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the pending display modes in the dynamic display start order, and the process is executed by the slave control means, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

It has a main control means for executing main control of the game, and a sub-control means for executing the control of the game according to the instruction of the main control means, and the main control means is based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Then, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed, and based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition, the success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the second lottery game, and the success/failure of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means. Based on the determination result, the first success/failure determination signal is generated based on the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means. , the sub control means, based on the first success determination signal, the first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success determination result of the first lottery game, and the second success determination signal a second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game; 2. In a gaming machine in which a privilege game advantageous to a player is awarded when the first or second identification information indicating win is stopped and displayed on the display means, the main control means controls the first or second win/fail. distinguishing between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and generating a success signal for notifying that the first or second success/failure determination condition has been satisfied; Establishment signal generating means for outputting to the sub-control means in the order in which the first or second success judgment conditions are met; dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode and determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition; When the first or second right/wrong determination condition is met, the right/wrong determination regarding the right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means is performed until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started. Information and dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means are used as main pending information, and order information and success/failure determination that the success/failure determination conditions corresponding to the main pending information are met. Main pending information storage means for identifiably storing whether the condition is the first propriety judgment condition or the second propriety judgment condition, and based on the fact that the main pending information is stored in the main pending information storage means and a main hold information signal generation means for generating a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information relating to the stored main hold information, wherein the slave control means receives the establishment signal. Based on this, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the success/failure determination condition that triggered the generation of the establishment signal becomes dynamically displayable, information on the number of times the establishment signal has been received is displayed. The first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition indicated by the establishment signal are discriminated, and the order in which the success/failure determination conditions obtained by combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are met can be identified. the sub-holding number storage means for storing as sub-holding number information; and the sub-holding of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition based on the sub-suspension number information stored in the sub-suspension number storage means While distinguishing the number information from each other, the establishment order of the success/failure determination conditions combining the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition is displayed in an identifiable pending display mode for each sub-holding number information. holding display means; subsidiary holding information storage means for storing, as subsidiary holding information, information relating to main holding information indicated by the main holding information signal based on the reception of the main holding information signal; and the secondary holding information storage means. a slave display mode determining means for determining the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means based on the secondary pending information stored in the secondary pending information storage means; When the pending information is stored, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information being dynamically displayed on the first or second display means is stored in the secondary pending information storage means first. until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new subordinate pending information starts, based on the dynamic display mode determined by the subordinate display mode determining means for each of the subordinate pending information dynamic display start time information determining means for determining the time information of and storing it in the secondary pending information storage means; and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display start time information determining means rearranging means for rearranging the pending display modes displayed on the pending display means in the order of starting the dynamic display based on the respective time information stored in the sub-holding information storage means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by:

According to the game machine N3, the main control of the game is executed by the main control means, and the control of the game is executed by the sub-control means according to the instruction of the main control means. In the main control means, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Then, a first success determination signal based on the success determination result of the first lottery game by the success determination means and a second success determination signal based on the success determination result of the second lottery game are generated by the success determination signal generation means. In the sub-control means, the first display means dynamically displays the first identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the first win/fail determination signal. In addition, the second display means dynamically displays the second identification information indicating the result of the win/loss determination of the second lottery game based on the second win/fail determination signal. Here, when the first or second identification information indicating the win is displayed on the first or second display means, the player is awarded a privilege game. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. The main control means distinguishes between the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first or second success/failure determination condition, and determines whether the first or second success/failure determination condition has been satisfied. is generated by the establishment signal generating means, and is output to the sub-control means in the order in which the first or second yes/no judging conditions are established. Based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success/failure determination condition. Further, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition. In the main control means, when the first or second right/wrong determination condition is satisfied, until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is started, the right/wrong determination means The success/failure determination information related to the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means and the dynamic display determination information related to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means serve as main pending information, and the success/failure determination condition corresponding to the main pending information is established. The order information obtained and the established success/failure judgment condition are stored in the main reserved information storage means so as to be identifiable as to whether they are the first success/failure judgment condition or the second success/failure judgment condition. In the main control means, the main hold information signal generating means generates a main hold information signal for notifying the slave control means of information relating to the stored main hold information based on the fact that the main hold information storage means is stored. be. Then, in the slave control means, based on the reception of the establishment signal, until the first or second identification information corresponding to the success/failure determination condition that triggered the generation of the establishment signal becomes dynamically displayable. , the information about the number of times the establishment signal is received distinguishes between the first judgment condition and the second judgment condition, and the judgment condition that combines the first judgment condition and the second judgment condition. are stored in the sub-retained number storage means as sub-retained number information so that the order of establishment of is identifiable. In the subordinate control means, based on the subordinate pending number information stored in the subordinate pending number storage means, while distinguishing the subordinate pending number information for the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition, for each subordinate pending number information The order in which the success/failure determination conditions, which are the combination of the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition, is established is performed by the suspension display means as a display in an identifiable suspension display mode. Upon receiving the main hold information signal, the slave control means stores information relating to the main hold information indicated by the main hold information signal as the subsidiary hold information in the subsidiary hold information storage means. The dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means of the main control means is determined by the passive display mode determining means based on the secondary pending information stored in the secondary pending information storage means. In the slave control means, when the slave hold information is newly stored in the slave hold information storage means, the remaining dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the slave hold information storage means dynamically display the first or second identification information corresponding to the new secondary pending information based on the dynamic display mode determined by the secondary display mode determining means for each secondary pending information stored in is determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means and stored in the sub-holding information storage means. Then, in the slave control means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pending display mode displayed on the pending display means is changed based on each time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. They are sorted by the sorting means in order to start dynamic display. As a result, for example, the main hold information of the second lottery game is newly stored in a state where the hold information of the first lottery game is previously stored. At this time, when the remaining dynamic display mode of the first identification information being dynamically displayed is a dynamic display mode longer than the remaining dynamic display mode of the second identification information being dynamically displayed, it is newly stored. The start time of the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the hold information of the second lottery game to be played is the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the hold information of the first lottery game stored earlier. Earlier than the display start time. However, since the pending display mode is displayed in order in the pending display mode indicating the order in which the success/failure determination conditions including the first success/failure determination condition and the second success/failure determination condition are established, the first lottery stored first is displayed in order. The suspension display mode of the newly stored second lottery game is displayed in the suspension display mode indicating the order after the game suspension information. As a result, the order in which the actual dynamic display starts may differ from the order in which the success/fail judgment conditions are established. They are sorted and displayed in starting order. Therefore, even if the dynamic display of the first identification information or the second identification information is started in an order different from the order in which the actual win-or-fail judgment conditions are satisfied, the player can use the rearrangement means to change the dynamic display start order. Since the pending display modes are rearranged, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed. Further, the main control means does not execute the process of rearranging the pending display modes in the dynamic display start order, and the process is executed by the slave control means, so that the control load on the main control means can be reduced.

In the game machine N1, the main hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold data even when the power is turned off, and the main control means controls the game machine when the power is turned on. Main initial control execution means for executing the main initial control process which is the initial setting of the main initial control process, and as one process of the main initial control process, based on the main hold information and time information stored in the main hold information storage means and a return data signal generation means for generating a return data signal and outputting it to the sub-control means, wherein the sub-control means initializes the game machine when the game machine is powered on. secondary initial control executing means for executing the secondary initial control process, and within the secondary initial control process executed by the secondary initial control executing means, the return data signal indicates based on the return data signal from the main control means a slave hold information returning means for storing information as slave return hold information in the slave hold information storage means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the data is retained in the main hold information storage means of the main control means even when the power is turned off. In the main control means, when the game machine is powered on, the main initial control process, which is the initial setting of the game machine, is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, a return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation means based on the main hold information and the time information stored in the main hold information storage means, and sent to the slave control means. output. In the secondary control means, when the game machine is powered on, the secondary initial control process, which is the initial setting of the game machine, is executed by the secondary initial control execution means. In the secondary initial control process executed by the secondary initial control execution means, information indicated by the return data signal is used as the secondary return hold information by the secondary hold information storage means based on the return data signal from the main control means. stored by means. As a result, when the power is turned on again to the gaming machine after a power failure occurs, the data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, and the sub-hold The follower return hold information is stored in the information storage means. Therefore, the data stored in the secondary hold information storage means can be restored to the state immediately before the power was turned off. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power-off, the suspended display mode that was displayed immediately before the power-off can be displayed to the player. Since the slave return hold information is stored as information based on the main hold information and the time information, the hold display modes are arranged in the order of start of fluctuation even when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is restored. can be displayed instead.

In any one of the game machines N1 to N3, the main hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold data even when the power is turned off, and the main control means controls the data when the game machine is powered on. a main initial control executing means for executing a main initial control process which is the initial setting of the gaming machine; return data signal generating means for generating a return data signal and outputting it to the sub-control means based on the main hold information received, and the sub-control means generates a return data signal when the gaming machine is powered on. secondary initial control executing means for executing secondary initial control processing which is the initial setting of the gaming machine; a slave hold information returning means for storing information indicated by the return data signal as slave return hold information in the slave hold information storage means.

According to the game machine described in the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of the game machines N1 to N3, the following effects are obtained. That is, the data is retained in the main hold information storage means of the main control means even when the power is turned off. In the main control means, when the game machine is powered on, the main initial control process, which is the initial setting of the game machine, is executed by the main initial control execution means. As one process of the main initial control process, a return data signal is generated by the return data signal generation means based on the main hold information stored in the main hold information storage means and output to the slave control means. In the secondary control means, when the game machine is powered on, the secondary initial control process, which is the initial setting of the game machine, is executed by the secondary initial control execution means. In the secondary initial control process executed by the secondary initial control execution means, information indicated by the return data signal is used as the secondary return hold information by the secondary hold information storage means based on the return data signal from the main control means. stored by means. As a result, when the power is turned on again to the gaming machine after a power failure occurs, the data stored in the main hold information storage means of the main control means is notified based on the return data signal, and the sub-hold The follower return hold information is stored in the information storage means. Therefore, it is possible to restore the data stored in the slave hold information storage means to the state immediately before the power was cut off. Therefore, when the power is restored from the power-off, the suspended display mode that was displayed immediately before the power-off can be displayed to the player.

In the game machine N4 or N5, the secondary hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored data even when the power supply is turned off, and the secondary hold information return means receives a request from the main control means. The information indicated by the return data signal is collated with the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means, and if it is determined that they match, the sub-hold information stored in the sub-hold information storage means is maintained. a game machine N6, wherein information indicated by the return data signal is stored in said secondary hold information storage means as secondary return hold information when it is determined that they do not match.

According to the game described in the gaming machine N6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4 or N5. In other words, the data is retained in the slave hold information storage means of the slave control means even when the power is turned off. In the slave control means, the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means and the information stored in the slave hold information storage means are collated by the slave hold information return means. As a result, when it is determined that they match, the subsidiary hold information stored in the subsidiary hold information storage means is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, the information indicated by the return data signal is stored in the slave hold information storage means as the slave return hold information. Therefore, the data in the pending information storage means can be updated according to more correct data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the correct pending display mode when the power is restored from the power-off.

In the game machine N4 or N5, the secondary hold information storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored data even when the power supply is turned off, and the secondary hold information return means receives a request from the main control means. The information indicated by the return data signal is compared with the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means, and if they match, the secondary hold information stored in the secondary hold information storage means is maintained; A gaming machine N7, characterized in that, if they do not match, the secondary hold information storage means is initialized and displayed in a hold display mode showing a provisional hold display mode.

According to the game machine N7, in addition to the effects of the game machine N4 or N5, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the data is retained in the slave hold information storage means of the slave control means even when the power is turned off. In the slave control means, the information indicated by the return data signal from the main control means and the information stored in the slave hold information storage means are collated by the slave hold information return means. As a result, when it is determined that they match, the subsidiary hold information stored in the subsidiary hold information storage means is maintained. If it is determined that they do not match, the slave hold information storage means is initialized and a hold display mode indicating a temporary hold display mode is displayed. Therefore, by displaying the provisional pending display mode, the store clerk or the like can recognize that there is an abnormality in the data stored in the secondary pending information storage means. Further, it is possible to prevent the display of the pending display mode based on wrong information to the player, and to prevent the player from being confused.

In any one of game machines N5 to N7, the dynamic display start time information determining means corresponds to the stored secondary return hold information based on the fact that the secondary return hold information is stored in the secondary hold information storage means. A game machine N8, characterized in that it determines time information to be played and stores it in the secondary hold information storage means.

According to the game machine described in the game machine N8, in addition to the effects of the game machine described in any one of the game machines N5 to N7, the following effects are obtained. That is, in the slave control means, the time information corresponding to the stored slave return hold information is determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means based on the fact that the slave return hold information is stored in the slave hold information storage means. , is stored in the subordinate hold information storage means. Therefore, after the power is restored from the power-off, it is possible to rearrange and display the hold display modes corresponding to the stored sub-return hold information in the order in which the fluctuation starts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by notifying the player of the order in which the variation starts even after the power is cut off.

In any one of the game machines N4 to N8, the rearrangement means determines that the predetermined condition is established when the sub return hold information is stored in the sub hold information storage means, and The gaming machine N9 is characterized in that it rearranges and displays the pending display modes.

According to the game machine N9, in addition to the effects of the game machines described in any one of the game machines N4 to N8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the slave return hold information is stored in the slave hold information storage means, the slave control means determines that a predetermined condition has been established, and the hold display mode is displayed in the order in which the dynamic display is started. Sorted and displayed by the sorting means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the suspended display modes are rearranged in the order in which the dynamic display is started. can be done easily.

A success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination of a first lottery game based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/failure determination of a second lottery game based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition, and the success/failure determination thereof. First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of right/failure determination in the order in which the second right/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a win, and the display control means displays the information on the first or second display means. a bonus game executing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, wherein Based on the establishment of the condition, a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established propriety determination condition is determined from a dynamic display mode group group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes, and the second propriety determination is performed. dynamic display mode determination means for determining, based on the establishment of the means, a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the established propriety determination condition from a group of dynamic display modes composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes; a notification for determining which of the dynamically displayed first identification information and the second identification information should be visually recognized by the player based on the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means; A game machine O1, characterized by comprising destination determination means and visual notifying means for notifying the identification information determined by the notification destination determining means so that the player can visually recognize the identification information.

According to the gaming machine O1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are satisfied. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Dynamic display modes are determined from a group of dynamic display modes including a plurality of dynamic display modes for dynamic display modes of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination conditions based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination conditions. Determined by means. Further, based on the establishment of the second right/wrong determination condition, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is dynamically displayed from a dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes. Determined by the mode determining means. Which of the dynamically displayed first identification information and the second identification information is to be notified to the player is determined by the notification destination determining means based on the success/failure determination result. The identification information determined by the notification destination determination means is notified by the visual notification means so that the player can visually recognize the identification information. As a result, the identification information to be visually recognized is determined based on the result of the judgment, so that the player can easily determine the identification information to be visually recognized, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, player confusion can be suppressed.

In the game machine O1, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode based on the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means, and the dynamic display mode group includes the success/failure determination means. It is configured to include a high-expectation dynamic display mode in which the success/failure determination result of is more likely to be determined in the case of a win than in the case of a loss, and the notification destination determination means is configured by the dynamic display mode determination means. Based on the determination of the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the first or second identification information for which the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed is determined as the notification destination. A game machine O2 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means. The dynamic display mode group includes a high-expectation dynamic display mode that is more likely to be determined when the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means is a hit than when the result is a failure. Based on the determination of the high-expectation dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining means, the first or second identification information for which the high-expectation dynamic display mode is to be dynamically displayed as the notification destination It is determined by the notification destination determining means. Therefore, by notifying the player to view the high-expectation dynamic display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the dynamic display mode determining means determines that one of the first identification information and the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode. and dynamic display delay means for delaying the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode is completed. A gaming machine O3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the determination by the dynamic display mode determining means that either the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determination The dynamic display delay means delays the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the selected high-expectation dynamic display mode ends. This can prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting while the high-expectation dynamic display mode is being dynamically displayed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

In the game machine O1 or O2, the dynamic display mode determination means has determined that either the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode. until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed in the selected high-expectation dynamic display mode ends based on the dynamic display time of the other identification information and target display extension means.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1 or O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the determination by the dynamic display mode determining means that either the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determination The dynamic display time of the other identification information is extended by the dynamic display extension means until the dynamic display of the selected high-expectation dynamic display mode ends. This can prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting while the high-expectation dynamic display mode is being dynamically displayed. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O4, the identification information notified by the sound output means for outputting the sound set in advance corresponding to the dynamic display mode and the notification destination determination means are the first identification information. a volume variable means for muting the sound corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information or setting the volume to a volume lower than normal, based on the determination of one of the second identification information; A game machine O5 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the voice output means outputs a preset voice corresponding to the dynamic display mode. When the identification information to be notified by the notification destination determining means is determined to be either the first identification information or the second identification information, the sound corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information is muted or The volume is set by the volume variable means to be smaller than the normal volume. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from concentrating more on the identification information determined by the notification destination determining means and overlooking the dynamically displayed dynamic display mode.

A success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination of a first lottery game based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/failure determination of a second lottery game based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition, and the success/failure determination thereof. First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of right/failure determination in the order in which the second right/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a win, and the display control means displays the information on the first or second display means. a bonus game executing means for providing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning, wherein Based on the establishment of the condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established propriety judgment condition is displayed based on the propriety judgment result by the propriety judgment means, when the propriety judgment result by the propriety judgment means is hit. , determined from a dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes including a high-expectation dynamic display mode that is more likely to be determined than in the case of failure, dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the determined right/wrong determination condition from the dynamic display mode group based on the right/wrong determination result of the right/wrong determination means; 2 If the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means based on the establishment of the success/failure determination condition is the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode Duplication determination means for determining whether the high-expectation dynamic display mode has been determined for identification information different from the identification information to be dynamically displayed; When it is determined that the high-expectation dynamic display mode is also determined, the motion of the high-expectation dynamic display mode corresponding to either one of the first identification information and the second identification information and dynamic display delay means for delaying the start of target display.

According to the gaming machine O6, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are established. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. Based on the establishment of the first success judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is more likely to be determined when the success judgment result by the success judgment means is hit than in the case of failure. It is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means from a dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes including the high-expectation dynamic display mode. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second right/wrong determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition from the dynamic display mode group. If the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the establishment of the first or second propriety determination condition is the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determined high-expectation dynamic The overlap determining means determines whether or not the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined for the identification information different from the identification information dynamically displayed in the display mode. When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the high-expectation-degree dynamic display mode is determined for different identification information, it corresponds to either the first identification information or the second identification information. The start of the high-expectation dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. As a result, even if the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the start of one of the high-expectation dynamic display modes is delayed. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode from being started. Therefore, the player can play the game while concentrating on the high-expectation dynamic display mode dynamically displayed first. As a result, player confusion can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine O6, the dynamic display delay means delays the dynamic display longer than the high-expectation dynamic display mode in which the identification information whose start of the dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine O7 characterized in that the start of the dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode in the identification information whose start is to be delayed is delayed.

According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the high expectation in which the identification information whose start of dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed longer than the dynamic display mode ends, and the high expectation in the identification information whose start of dynamic display is delayed The start of dynamic display of the dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. As a result, after the dynamic display of one high-expectation dynamic display mode ends, the delayed dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode is started. A game can be played while concentrating on the high-expectation dynamic display mode. Therefore, the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

The gaming machine O6 or O7 has visual notifying means for notifying the player to visually recognize the identification information different from the identification information whose start of dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. A game machine O8 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine O6 or O7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the visual notification means notifies the player to visually recognize the identification information different from the identification information for which the start of the dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Therefore, the player can easily determine which dynamic display of the identification information should be focused on. Therefore, player confusion can be suppressed.

A success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination of a first lottery game based on establishment of a first success/failure determination condition and a success/failure determination of a second lottery game based on establishment of a second success/failure determination condition, and the success/failure determination thereof. First display means for dynamically displaying first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met; second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a result of right/failure determination in the order in which the second right/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of information on the second display means, and the success/failure determination result by the success/failure determination means becomes a win, and the display control means displays the information on the first or second display means. a bonus game executing means for awarding a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win, wherein: 2 When the success/failure determination condition is established, the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is displayed until dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is started. hold information storage means for storing hold information having at least right/wrong judgment information of right/wrong judgment by said right/wrong judgment means executed when identification information can start dynamic display; Based on the fact that the pending information is stored, whether or not the pending information is valid before the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each of the pending information stored in the pending information storage means can be started. Preliminary right/wrong determination means for making a determination in advance, and advance notification for determining whether or not to notify that the result of the prior determination was a win based on the result of the right/wrong determination by the prior right/wrong determination means being a win A game machine P1 characterized by having a determination means and a pre-reading notification means for notifying a player of the success/failure determination result of the prior success/failure determination means when the advance notification determination means determines to notify. .

According to the gaming machine P1, the success/failure determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success/failure determination means based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are satisfied. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied. Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently. When the first or second yes/no judgment condition is established, the first or second identification information corresponding to the established yes/no judgment condition starts to be dynamically displayed. Reserved information having at least right/wrong determination information of right/wrong determination by the right/wrong determination means executed when the first or second identification information becomes dynamically displayable is stored in the pending information storage means. Before the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to each piece of pending information stored in the pending information storing means is enabled based on the fact that the pending information is newly stored in the pending information storing means , the propriety judgment of the reserved information is performed in advance by the prior propriety judging means. Based on the result of the winning judgment by the prior winning judgment means, the prior notification determining means determines whether or not to notify that the result of the prior judgment is winning. When the prior notification determination means determines to notify that the result of the prior determination is a win, the player is notified of the result of the determination by the prior determination means by the pre-reading notification means. As a result, the result of the success/failure determination is notified in advance before the result of the success/failure determination is notified by the identification information, so the result of the success/failure determination can be notified to the player more quickly, and the expectation for the big win can be increased. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In the game machine P1, based on the satisfaction of the first success judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfaction of the success judgment condition is determined, and based on the establishment of the second success judgment means, dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the success/failure determination condition established, wherein the reserved information storage means stores the dynamic display mode when the first or second success/failure determination condition is met; hold information having at least information relating to the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determining means until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition is started; is stored, and when the first or second propriety determination condition is satisfied and new pending information is stored, the remaining dynamic display of the first or second identification information during dynamic display Based on the time and the previously stored dynamic display mode for each piece of pending information, time information until the dynamic display of the first or second identification information corresponding to the new pending information is started is determined. Then, the dynamic display start time information determining means stored in the holding information storage means and the first lottery game and the second lottery game executed after the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game are determined by Lottery information for selecting whether or not to shift to a special game state in which winning is more likely to occur than usual is acquired based on the establishment of the first or second win/fail determination condition, and the first or second win/fail determination condition is obtained. a game state lottery means for storing the lottery information in the hold information storage means in association with the hold information when the is established and the hold information corresponding to the established determination condition is stored. , the prior suitability determination means determines whether the game state at the start of the dynamic display corresponding to each piece of pending information is the special game state based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determining means. The game machine P2 is characterized in that it judges based on the lottery information and determines whether the game is successful or not in advance.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination condition based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination condition. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second success/failure determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode related to the time information of the second identification information corresponding to the fulfillment of the success/failure determination condition. When the first or second success/failure determination condition is established, the dynamic display mode determination means determines the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition until the dynamic display is started. Pending information having at least information about the dynamic display mode is stored in the pending information storage means. When the first or second propriety determination condition is satisfied and new pending information is stored, the remaining dynamic display time of the first or second identification information during dynamic display and the previously stored Dynamic display start time information determining means determines time information until dynamic display of first or second identification information corresponding to new pending information starts, based on the dynamic display mode for each piece of pending information and stored in the hold information storage means. A lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a winning judgment between a first lottery game and a second lottery game executed after a privilege game executing means executes the privilege game is more likely to occur than in normal times. Information is acquired by the game state lottery means based on the establishment of the first or second success determination condition. Further, when the first or second success/failure determination condition is established and the hold information corresponding to the established judgment condition is stored, the lottery information is held by the game state lottery means in association with the hold information. It is stored in the information storage means. Based on the time information determined by the dynamic display start time information determination means, it is determined by lottery information whether the game state at the start of the dynamic display corresponding to each piece of reservation information is a special game state, and the prior success/failure determination means. The suitability judgment is executed in advance. As a result, the game state at the start of the variation is determined in advance, and based on the result, the winning/losing determination is performed in advance, so that a more accurate prior winning/losing determination can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of accurate information in advance, and to suppress the confusion of the player.

In the gaming machine P2, when the result of the win/fail judgment executed based on the established win/fail judgment condition is a win after the prior notification determining means decides to notify that the result of the prior judgment is a win. a), the dynamic display mode determination means uses the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition as the notification determination means to notify the winning; A game machine P3 characterized in that said first or second identification information corresponding to information determines an extended dynamic display mode longer than the start of dynamic display.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P2, the following effects are produced. That is, after the advance notification determination means determines to notify that the result of the prior determination is a win, if the result of the win/fail judgment executed based on the established win/fail judgment condition is a win, the dynamic The display mode determining means uses the dynamic display mode of the first or second identification information corresponding to the established success/failure determination condition as the first or second display mode corresponding to the pending information informing that the notification determining means was a win. 2 an extended dynamic display mode longer than the identification information to initiate the dynamic display is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means; Here, after the pre-reading notification means notifies that the result of the preliminary determination is winning, the lottery game based on the success/failure determination condition established after that is determined to be winning by stop-displaying the identification information earlier than the notified lottery game. Therefore, if the game state is changed, the result of the preliminary determination may change. Then, as a result of the change in the result of the preliminary determination, even though the pre-reading informing means announced the winning, there may be a problem that the winning does not occur. However, since the extended dynamic display mode is determined, the identification information corresponding to the hold information previously notified of the winning is dynamically displayed first. Therefore, since the dynamic display is started in the same game state as the game state determined when the preliminary determination is performed, the result of the preliminary determination and the determination at the start of the dynamic display can be matched. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, A game machine I1 in any one of N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P3, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, A game machine I2 in any one of N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P3, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A5, B1, C1 to C5, D1 or D2, E1 to E3, F1 or F2, G1, H1 or H2, I1 to I14, J1 to J5, K1 to K4, L1 to L7, M1 to M6, A game machine I3 in any one of N1 to N9, O1 to O8, and P1 to P3, wherein the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a game machine such as a pachinko machine displays a dynamic display of a special pattern to notify the result of the lottery when a game ball enters a plurality of starting holes provided on the game board surface. Executed at the display device. In such a configuration, the success or failure of the game is individually drawn for each starting opening, and the lottery result is a special symbol corresponding to each starting opening (for example, the first special symbol for two starting openings). After the symbol and the second special symbol) are dynamically displayed, the result of the lottery is announced. In this way, a game machine has been proposed in which a plurality of special symbols can be displayed dynamically at the same time.
For example, in Patent Document 1, when a game ball enters the first start port, dynamic display of the first special symbol is started, and when the game ball enters the second start port, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is started. Start display. Therefore, when either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is dynamically displayed, and the game ball enters the starting hole corresponding to the other special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. Both are in a state of dynamic display at the same time. Then, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol stops in a display mode informing a big win, the game shifts to a big win game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-319221).
By the way, in such a gaming machine, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are dynamically displayed at the same time. There was a problem that confused the player.
An object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine that dynamically displays a plurality of special symbols at the same time, in which confusion of the player can be suppressed.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 executes the win/loss determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first win/fail determination condition, and the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second win/fail determination condition. The success/failure determination means for executing the success/failure determination of the lottery game and the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means are dynamically displayed in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are met. a first display means, a second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the result of the success/failure determination of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the second success/failure determination conditions are satisfied; Display control means capable of dynamically controlling the display of the first identification information on the first display means and the second identification information on the second display means, respectively, and the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means are the winners. a privilege game that provides a privilege game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed on the first or second display means by the display control means in a display mode indicating a win; and an execution means, wherein the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied judgment condition is composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes based on the establishment of the first judgment condition. determined from the display mode group, and based on the establishment of the second propriety judgment means, the dynamic dynamic display mode determination means for determining from a display mode group; It has notification destination determination means for determining based on the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means, and visual notification means for visually notifying the player of the identification information determined by the notification destination determination means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the dynamic display mode determination means determines the dynamic display mode based on the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means. and the dynamic display mode group includes a high-expectation dynamic display mode that is more likely to be determined when the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means is a hit than when it is a failure, and Based on the determination of the high-expectation-level dynamic display mode by the dynamic display-mode determination means, the notification destination determination means selects the first display mode for dynamic display of the high-expectation-level dynamic display mode. Alternatively, the second identification information is determined as the notification destination.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the dynamic display mode determining means selects one of the first identification information and the second identification information as the high expectation level. Based on the fact that it is determined to be dynamically displayed by the dynamic display mode, the dynamic display of the other identification information is started until the dynamic display of the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode ends. and dynamic display delay means for delaying the display.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the dynamic display mode determining means selects one of the first identification information and the second identification information as the high-expectation motion. dynamic display of the first or second identification information dynamically displayed in the selected high expectation dynamic display mode is terminated and a dynamic display extension means for extending the dynamic display time of the other identification information until.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, wherein audio output means for outputting a preset audio corresponding to the dynamic display mode; When the identification information notified by the determining means is determined to be one of the first identification information and the second identification information, the sound corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information is muted or and a volume variable means for setting the volume to be smaller than normal.
The gaming machine of Technical Idea 6 executes the success/failure determination of the first lottery game based on the establishment of the first success/failure determination condition, and executes the success/failure determination of the second lottery game based on the establishment of the second success/failure determination condition. and a first display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are satisfied; second display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the success/failure determination result of the second lottery game by the success/failure determination means in the order in which the second success/failure determination condition is met; 1 display control means capable of dynamically controlling display of the second identification information on the second display means; bonus game execution means for awarding a bonus game advantageous to the player when the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating winning on the first or second display means. a dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established right/wrong determination condition is determined by the right/wrong determination means based on the right/wrong determination result of the right/wrong determination means; When the result is a hit, the result is determined from a group of dynamic display modes composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes including a high-expectation dynamic display mode that is easier to determine than the case of a loss, and the second success determination means dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the success/failure determination condition established, based on the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means from the dynamic display mode group; , when the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the establishment of the first or second propriety determination condition is the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determined high-expectation dynamic display mode duplicate determination means for determining whether the high-expectation dynamic display mode has been determined for identification information different from identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode; When it is determined that the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined for different identification information, the high-expectation degree corresponding to either the first identification information or the second identification information is determined. and dynamic display delay means for delaying the start of dynamic display of the dynamic display mode.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 7 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 6, wherein the dynamic display delaying means dynamically displays the identification information whose start of dynamic display is not delayed. It delays the start of the dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode in the identification information that delays the start of the dynamic display longer than the end of the dynamic display mode.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 8 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 6 or 7, wherein the identification information different from the identification information whose start of dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means is visually recognized by the player. It has visual notifying means for notifying as shown.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the success determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success determination means based on the establishment of the first success determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are satisfied. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied.
Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently.
Dynamic display modes are determined from a group of dynamic display modes including a plurality of dynamic display modes for dynamic display modes of the first identification information corresponding to the satisfied determination conditions based on the satisfaction of the first success/failure determination conditions. Determined by means. Further, based on the establishment of the second right/wrong determination condition, the dynamic display of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition is dynamically displayed from a dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes. Determined by the mode determining means.
Which of the dynamically displayed first identification information and the second identification information is to be notified to the player is determined by the notification destination determining means based on the success/failure determination result. The identification information determined by the notification destination determination means is notified by the visual notification means so that the player can visually recognize the identification information.
As a result, the identification information to be visually recognized is determined based on the result of the judgment, so that the player can easily determine the identification information to be visually recognized, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means. The dynamic display mode group includes a high-expectation dynamic display mode that is more likely to be determined when the success/failure determination result of the success/failure determination means is a hit than when the result is a failure. Based on the determination of the high-expectation dynamic display mode by the dynamic display mode determining means, the first or second identification information for which the high-expectation dynamic display mode is to be dynamically displayed as the notification destination It is determined by the notification destination determining means. Therefore, by notifying the player to view the high-expectation dynamic display mode, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the high-expectation dynamic display mode.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the determination by the dynamic display mode determining means that either the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determination The dynamic display delay means delays the start of the dynamic display of the other identification information until the dynamic display of the selected high-expectation dynamic display mode ends.
This can prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting while the high-expectation dynamic display mode is being dynamically displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the determination by the dynamic display mode determining means that either the first identification information or the second identification information is dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determination The dynamic display time of the other identification information is extended by the dynamic display extension means until the dynamic display of the selected high-expectation dynamic display mode ends.
This can prevent the dynamic display of the other identification information from newly starting while the high-expectation dynamic display mode is being dynamically displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can concentrate on the identification information dynamically displayed in the high-expectation dynamic display mode.
According to the game described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are obtained. That is, the voice output means outputs a preset voice corresponding to the dynamic display mode. When the identification information to be notified by the notification destination determining means is determined to be either the first identification information or the second identification information, the sound corresponding to the dynamic display mode of the other identification information is muted or The volume is set by the volume variable means to be smaller than the normal volume. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from concentrating more on the identification information determined by the notification destination determination means and overlooking the dynamically displayed dynamic display mode.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 6, the success determination of the first lottery game is executed by the success determination means based on the establishment of the first success determination condition. Further, based on the establishment of the second success determination condition, the success determination of the second lottery game is executed by the success determination means. Dynamic display of the first identification information indicating the success/failure determination of the first lottery game by the success/failure determination means is performed by the first display means in the order in which the first success/failure determination conditions are satisfied. In addition, the dynamic display of the second identification information indicating the result of the win/fail determination of the second lottery game by the win/fail determination means is performed by the second display means in the order in which the second win/fail determination conditions are satisfied.
Here, the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed by the first display means and the second display means, respectively, by the display control means. Then, when the result of the success/failure determination by the success/failure determination means is a win, and the first or second identification information is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the win by the display control means, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. carried out by means. Thereby, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed even while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and the first lottery game and the second lottery game can be executed efficiently.
Based on the establishment of the first success judgment condition, the dynamic display mode of the first identification information corresponding to the established success judgment condition is more likely to be determined when the success judgment result by the success judgment means is hit than in the case of failure. It is determined by the dynamic display mode determining means from a dynamic display mode group composed of a plurality of dynamic display modes including the high-expectation dynamic display mode. Further, based on the satisfaction of the second right/wrong determination condition, the dynamic display mode determining means determines the dynamic display mode of the second identification information corresponding to the satisfied right/wrong determination condition from the dynamic display mode group.
If the dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means based on the establishment of the first or second propriety determination condition is the high-expectation dynamic display mode, the determined high-expectation dynamic The overlap determining means determines whether or not the high-expectation dynamic display mode is determined for the identification information different from the identification information dynamically displayed in the display mode.
When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the high-expectation-degree dynamic display mode is determined for different identification information, it corresponds to either the first identification information or the second identification information. The start of the high-expectation dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means.
As a result, even if the high-expectation dynamic display mode is dynamically displayed on the first display means and the second display means, the start of one of the high-expectation dynamic display modes is delayed. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode from being started. Therefore, the player can play the game while concentrating on the high-expectation dynamic display mode dynamically displayed first. As a result, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 6, the following effects are obtained. That is, the high expectation in which the identification information whose start of dynamic display is not delayed is dynamically displayed longer than the dynamic display mode ends, and the high expectation in the identification information whose start of dynamic display is delayed A start of dynamic display of the dynamic display mode is delayed by the dynamic display delay means.
As a result, after the dynamic display of one high-expectation dynamic display mode ends, the delayed dynamic display of the high-expectation dynamic display mode is started. A game can be played while concentrating on the high-expectation dynamic display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 6 or 7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the visual notification means notifies the player to visually recognize the identification information different from the identification information for which the start of the dynamic display is delayed by the dynamic display delay means. Therefore, the player can easily determine which dynamic display of the identification information should be focused on. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's confusion can be suppressed.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 Third pattern display device (first display means, second display means, pattern display means )
114 display control device (part of display control means)
201 MPU ( discrimination means)
203u rearrangement reservation storage area (part of storage means)
223k secondary reordering reserved storage area (part of storage means)
S310 (dynamic display period determination means)
S1406 (variable means)

Claims (1)

acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition and capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition;
storage means capable of storing the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means;
Based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition, the first determination is executed based on the first information stored in the storage means, and based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition, the first determination stored in the storage means is performed. a determination means capable of executing a second determination based on two pieces of information;
a first display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result in the first determination;
a second display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating a second determination result in the second determination;
The first identification information for indicating that the first determination result is a specific first determination result or the second identification information for indicating that the second determination result is a specific second determination result is stopped In a gaming machine that provides a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when displayed,
dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and capable of determining a dynamic display period of the second identification information;
When the first information is newly stored in the storage means, the stored first information is obtained by executing an acquisition determination as a predetermined determination corresponding to the newly stored first information. Information corresponding to the determined first information is stored in a predetermined storage area so as to be able to identify the order in which the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to is started, and the second information is newly added to the When stored in the storage means, the second identification information corresponding to the stored second information is dynamically identified by executing the acquisition determination corresponding to the newly stored second information. information storage means for storing information corresponding to the second information determined to be acquired in a predetermined storage area so as to be able to identify an order in which display is started;
first number display information capable of indicating the number of the first information before the first determination is performed among the first information acquired by the acquisition means; and a number display means capable of displaying second number display information capable of indicating the number of said second information before said second discrimination is executed among said second information;
When a predetermined condition is established, the display position of the displayed first number display information is changed to the displayed second number display information based on the information stored in the information storage means . The dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the first number display information is moved to the display position side indicating that the order of starting dynamic display of the first identification information is closer than the dynamic display of the corresponding second identification information. means for notifying the order in which the first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed ;
based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, a specific display mode can be displayed on the back side where the first number display information and the second number display information are displayed, respectively;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined condition is constructed so as not to be established during the privilege game .

Images